毗兰若篇章的注释巴利
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
“ 我将从各种角度说明‘以tena等起首’这段文字的含义。
我将以展示的方式撰写律藏的义理解说。”巴利
‘‘Tenātiādipāṭhassa, atthaṃ nānappakārato; Dassayanto karissāmi, vinayassatthavaṇṇana’’nti.
因为前面已经说过,所以我要来解释“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”这些词句的含义。具体来说:“tena”是一个没有明确指定对象的指示词。它虽然没有直接说出具体所指,但可以用“yena”这个词来对应说明——后文之中,“yena”在意义上已经成立。因为在后文里,具寿舍利弗生起了那个思虑,而它正是请求佛陀制定戒律之因。因此,应当这样理解这里的关联:具寿舍利弗生起那个思虑的那一刻,世尊正住在毗兰若。这一点在整个律藏中都成立,也就是说:凡是说到“tena”的地方,无论在前文还是后文,都应当用在意义上已经成立的“yena”这个词来对应说明。巴利
Vuttattā tena samayena buddho bhagavātiādīnaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Seyyathidaṃ – tenāti aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ. Tassa sarūpena avuttenapi aparabhāge atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso kātabbo. Aparabhāge hi vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto āyasmato sāriputtassa parivitakko siddho. Tasmā yena samayena so parivitakko udapādi, tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Ayañhi sabbasmimpi vinaye yutti, yadidaṃ yattha yattha ‘‘tenā’’ti vuccati tattha tattha pubbe vā pacchā vā atthato siddhena ‘‘yenā’’ti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso kātabboti.
这里先简略示意一下:“那么,比丘们,我将为比丘们制定学处,因为苏丁那行了淫法;正因为他行了,所以我要制定。”这就是所说的意思。这样,先用意义上已经成立的前文“yena”这个词来对应指代,是说得通的。又如“那时,世尊住在王舍城,当陶匠之子檀尼耶拿了国王未给的木材时”,这样用意义上已经成立的后文“yena”这个词来对应指代,也是说得通的。这就是“tena”这个词的意思。至于“samayena”中的“samaya”这个词,首先——巴利
Tatridaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ – ‘‘tena hi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmi, yena sudinno methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevi; yasmā paṭisevi, tasmā paññapessāmī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tāva pubbe atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso yujjati. Tena samayena buddho bhagavā rājagahe viharati, yena samayena dhaniyo kumbhakāraputto rañño dārūni adinnaṃ ādiyīti evaṃ pacchā atthato siddhena yenāti iminā vacanena paṭiniddeso yujjatīti vutto tenāti vacanassa attho. Samayenāti ettha pana samayasaddo tāva –
在聚合、刹那、时节、群体、因和见解中,
在获得、断除和通达中都能看到它。巴利
Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetu-diṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati.
同样地,对于“也许我们明天也能前去,趁着适当的时机和时刻”(长部1.447)这类句子,这里的samaya是“时机”的意思。对于“诸比丘,只有一个刹那和时机是用于修梵行的”(增支部8.29)这类句子,这里的samaya是“刹那”的意思。对于“暑热时节、酷热时节”(巴吉帝亚358)这类句子,这里的samaya是“时节”的意思。对于“森林中的大集会”这类句子,这里的samaya是“群集”的意思。对于“跋达离,你确实没有通达这个时机——世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道我——名叫跋达离的比丘在导师的教法中,于学处上没有圆满实行。跋达离,这也是你没有通达的时机”(中部2.135)这类句子,这里的samaya是“原因”的意思。对于“那时,游方僧乌伽诃摩那,也就是沙门文迪迦之子,穿着丁杜卡树皮衣,住在茉莉园中独一厅堂里,宣说时机论”(中部2.260)这类句子,这里的samaya是“见解”的意思。巴利
Tathā hissa – ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.447) evamādīsu samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’ti (a. ni. 8.29) evamādīsu khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’ti (pāci. 358) evamādīsu kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’nti evamādīsu samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi – ‘bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati – bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.135) evamādīsu hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggahamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.260) evamādīsu diṭṭhi.
“ 于现世凡有利益,于来世凡有利益;
以通达利益故,智者被称为贤哲。”巴利
‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.129);
在这些地方,它是“获得”的意思。在“以止灭慢而作苦的尽头”(中部1.28)这类语句中,它是“断除”的意思。在“苦有逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、通达义”(无碍解道2.8)这类语句中,它是“通达”的意思。但在这里,它是“时间”的意思。因此,这里的含义应当这样理解:具寿舍利弗生起那个思虑——即请求制定学处之因的思虑——的那个时候,便是此处所说的“在那时”。巴利
Evamādīsu paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.28) evamādīsu pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 2.8) evamādīsu paṭivedho attho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tasmā yena kālena āyasmato sāriputtassa vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto parivitakko udapādi, tena kālenāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
这里有人问:那么,为什么在经里用宾格说“一时”,在阿毗达摩里用依格说“于某时”,而这里不那样,却用工具格说“以那时”呢?因为那里和这里所存在的意义不同。怎么不同呢?在经里,有“完全结合”的意义。因为世尊讲《梵网》等经的那个时候,完全是以悲心而住;所以为了说明那个意义,那里用了宾格。在阿毗达摩里,则有“依止”的意义,以及以状态显示状态之相的意义。因为“时”有依止义,也就是时间义和集会义;而那里的“时”,是以刹那、集会、原因为相而显示出那里所说的触等诸法的状态。所以为了说明那个意义,那里用了依格。但在这里,有“原因”的意义和“工具”的意义。因为那个制定学处的时机,即使是舍利弗等人也难以了知;世尊以那个时机作为原因和工具,在制戒时观待着制定学处的缘由而住于各处;因此应当知道,为了说明那个意义,这里用了工具格。关于此,有偈颂如下:巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘atha kasmā yathā suttante ‘ekaṃ samaya’nti upayogavacanena niddeso kato, abhidhamme ca ‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’nti bhummavacanena, tathā akatvā idha ‘tena samayenā’ti karaṇavacanena niddeso kato’’ti? Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Kathaṃ? Suttante tāva accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā brahmajālādīni suttantāni desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi; tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha upayoganiddeso kato. Abhidhamme ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo, tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhiyati. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacanena niddeso kato. Idha pana hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi; tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti veditabbo. Hoti cettha –
“ 以工具格和地格,观待这样那样的意义;
在其他地方说到‘时’时,是用别的格来说的;而这里只用工具格。”巴利
‘‘Upayogena bhummena, taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhiya; Aññatra samayo vutto, karaṇeneva so idhā’’ti.
古注师们则这样解说:不管是说“一时”、还是说“在某个时候”、还是说“在那时”,这只是说法上的差别,无论在哪里,表达的都是处格的意义。所以,按照他们的主张,即使说的是“在那时”,也应该理解为“在那个时刻”的意思。巴利
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘ekaṃ samaya’nti vā ‘yasmiṃ samaye’ti vā ‘tena samayenā’ti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummameva attho’’ti. Tasmā tesaṃ laddhiyā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vuttepi ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
接下来我们要解释“佛陀、世尊”这些词的含义。在“住在毗兰若”这一句里,“毗兰若”是某座城市的别名,意思是“在那座毗兰若城里”;这里的格位表示“在附近”。“住”这个词,笼统地说,是指具备四种威仪——行、住、坐、卧——以及天住、梵住、圣住等任何一种安住状态。但在这里,它特指与行、住、坐、卧这些威仪中的某一种相应。因此要这样理解:世尊无论是站着、走着、坐着还是躺着,都称为“住”。因为他用一种威仪中断另一种威仪带来的逼迫,让身体持续运转而不损坏,所以称为“住”。巴利
Buddho bhagavāti imesaṃ padānaṃ parato atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāma. Verañjāyaṃ viharatīti ettha pana verañjāti aññatarassa nagarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassaṃ verañjāyaṃ; samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpanametaṃ, idha pana ṭhānagamananisajjāsayanappabhedesuairiyāpathesu aññatarairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ, tena ṭhitopi gacchantopi nisinnopi sayānopi bhagavā viharaticceva veditabbo. So hi ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.
在“那勒鲁普支曼达树根处”这一说法里,“那勒鲁”是一个夜叉的名字,“普支曼达”是苦楝树,“根处”是指附近。因为“根”这个词,在“连根拔起,哪怕只有须芒草茎那么细的根”等经文里,指的是树根;在“贪是不善根”等经文里,指的是不共因;在“直到正午时分树荫覆盖,无风处树叶落下,到这范围就叫树根处”等经文里,指的是附近。这里取的是“附近”的意思,所以应当理解为:在那勒鲁夜叉所占据的苦楝树附近。据说那棵苦楝树优美动人,像统领众多树木的王者一样,长在离那座城不远、来往方便的地方。那时,世尊到了毗兰若,住在合适的地方,就住在那棵树附近的下面。因此说:“在毗兰若,住在那勒鲁普支曼达树根处。”巴利
Naḷerupucimandamūleti ettha naḷeru nāma yakkho, pucimandoti nimbarukkho, mūlanti samīpaṃ. Ayañhi mūlasaddo ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya antamaso usīranāḷimattānipī’’ti (a. ni. 4.195) -ādīsu mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305) -ādīsu asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāva majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idha pana samīpe adhippeto, tasmā naḷeruyakkhena adhiggahitassa pucimandassa samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. So kira pucimando ramaṇīyo pāsādiko anekesaṃ rukkhānaṃ ādhipaccaṃ viya kurumāno tassa nagarassa avidūre gamanāgamanasampanne ṭhāne ahosi. Atha bhagavā verañjaṃ gantvā patirūpe ṭhāne viharanto tassa rukkhassa samīpe heṭṭhābhāge vihāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti.
这里也许有人会问:如果世尊住在毗兰若,那就不该说“在那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”;如果他住在那里,那就不该说“在毗兰若”。因为世尊不可能在同一时间、不分先后地住在两个地方,不是吗?但这事不能这样看。我们不是已经说过“处格可以表示邻近”吗?所以,就像在恒河、耶牟那河附近吃草的牛群,人们会说它们“在恒河吃草”“在耶牟那河吃草”;同样,这里那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处就在毗兰若附近,世尊住在那里,就说他“在毗兰若,住在那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”。说“毗兰若”,是为了指出他托钵的村庄;说“那勒鲁夜叉的阎浮树根处”,是为了指出适合出家人居住的地方。巴利
Tattha siyā yadi tāva bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharati, ‘‘naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti na vattabbaṃ, atha tattha viharati, ‘‘verañjāya’’nti na vattabbaṃ, na hi sakkā ubhayattha teneva samayena apubbaṃ acarimaṃ viharitunti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘samīpatthe bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yathā gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ samīpe goyūthāni carantāni ‘‘gaṅgāya caranti, yamunāya carantī’’ti vuccanti; evamidhāpi yadidaṃ verañjāya samīpe naḷerupucimandamūlaṃ tattha viharanto vuccati ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa verañjāvacanaṃ. Pabbajitānurūpanivāsanaṭṭhānanidassanatthaṃ naḷerupucimandamūlavacanaṃ.
在这里,通过提到毗兰若,具寿优波离长老展示了世尊对在家众的摄受;通过提到那勒鲁夜叉的苦楝树根处,展示了対出家众的摄受。同样地,前者因为接受资具,展示了远离自我折磨的苦行;后者因为舍弃事欲,展示了远离沉溺欲乐的方法。前者展示了精勤说法,后者展示了乐住远离;前者展示了以悲悯亲近,后者展示了以智慧远离;前者展示了致力于成就众生的利益安乐,后者展示了在作利他安乐之事时无所染着;前者展示了以不舍弃如法安乐为相的安稳住,后者展示了以修习上人法为相;前者展示了对人类多所饶益,后者展示了对诸天神多所饶益;前者展示了生于世间、在世间成长,后者展示了不为世间所染;前者依据“诸比丘,有一人出现于世,为利益多人、为安乐多人、为悲悯世间,为诸天神与人的利益、福祉与安乐而出现。那一个人是谁?是如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者”这段话,展示了世尊出现于世所成就的目的;后者展示了与所生之处相应的住法。因为世尊第一次在蓝毗尼园,第二次在菩提道场,都是以世间与出世间的生起,都生于林中,所以这显示了他住于林中。应当以这样的方式来理解此处义理的关联。巴利
Tattha verañjākittanena āyasmā upālitthero bhagavato gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇaṃ dasseti, naḷerupucimandamūlakittanena pabbajitānuggahakaraṇaṃ, tathā purimena paccayaggahaṇato attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ, pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassanaṃ; purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyogaṃ, pacchimena vivekādhimuttiṃ; purimena karuṇāya upagamanaṃ , pacchimena paññāya apagamanaṃ; purimena sattānaṃ hitasukhanipphādanādhimuttataṃ, pacchimena parahitasukhakaraṇe nirupalepanaṃ; purimena dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ, pacchimena uttarimanussadhammānuyoganimittaṃ; purimena manussānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ, pacchimena devatānaṃ; purimena loke jātassa loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvaṃ, pacchimena lokena anupalittataṃ; purimena ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.170) vacanato yadatthaṃ bhagavā uppanno tadatthaparinipphādanaṃ, pacchimena yattha uppanno tadanurūpavihāraṃ. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ lumbinīvane, dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lokiyalokuttarāya uppattiyā vaneyeva uppanno, tenassa vaneyeva vihāraṃ dassetīti evamādinā nayenettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
“与大比丘僧团一起”这句话里,“大”既是因为功德大而说大,也是因为人数多而说大。因为那个比丘僧团在功德上也是大的——其中排在最后的一位也已经是入流者;在人数上也是大的,因为有五百人之多。“比丘僧团”就是比丘们的集合,意思是见解和戒律都相同的沙门团体。“一起”就是共同在一起。“与大约五百位比丘”:这里的“五百”是指他们的数量,所以叫“五百许”。“比丘百众”就是比丘的百数,和那些大约五百位比丘共同而行。“量”就是标准的意思。所以就像说“在饮食上知量”时,意思是知道饮食的量,知道标准;这里也应如此理解:那些比丘百数的“五百许”,就是五百个标准。比丘的百数就是比丘百众,与那些大约五百位比丘一起。以此说明了前面所说的“与大比丘僧团一起”中,那个大比丘僧团在人数上的大。后面又以“舍利弗,比丘僧团确实无浊、无过患、无黑暗、清净、安住于核心。舍利弗,这五百位比丘中,排在最后的一位也是入流者”这段话,将显示其在功德上的大。巴利
Mahatābhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti ettha mahatāti guṇamahattenapi mahatā; saṅkhyāmahattenapi, so hi bhikkhusaṅgho guṇehipi mahā ahosi, yasmā yo tattha pacchimako so sotāpanno; saṅkhyāyapi mahā pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅghena bhikkhusaṅghena; diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato. Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañca mattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati. Tasmā yathā ‘‘bhojane mattaññū’’ti vutte bhojane mattaṃ jānāti, pamāṇaṃ jānātīti attho hoti; evamidhāpi tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañca mattā pañcappamāṇanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni, tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi. Etena yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhi’’nti, ettha tassa mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa saṅkhyāmahattaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Parato panassa ‘‘nirabbudo hi, sāriputta bhikkhusaṅgho nirādīnavo apagatakāḷako suddho sāre patiṭṭhito. Imesañhi, sāriputta, pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ yo pacchimako so sotāpanno’’ti vacanena guṇamahattaṃ āvibhavissati.
毗兰若婆罗门听到了。其中“听到了”就是听见、获得,是随着声音通过耳门传来而了知。“确”这个字只是用来补足句子,或者用作表示强调的虚词。如果取强调义,就是“确实听到了”,应理解为:他听闻时没有任何障碍。如果作补足词,那只是为了语句音韵顺畅而已。因生于毗兰若,或存在于毗兰若,或以毗兰若为住处,所以叫“毗兰若”。不过,依父母所取的名字,他被称为“伍达亚”。“婆罗门”意为“讽诵圣典者”,也就是讽诵圣典的意思。这正是对种姓婆罗门一词的词源解释。而圣者们因为已经舍断诸恶,所以被称为“婆罗门”。巴利
Assosi kho verañjo brāhmaṇoti assosīti suṇi upalabhi, sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsi. Khoti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇatthe vā nipāto. Tattha avadhāraṇatthena assosi eva, nāssa koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho veditabbo. Padapūraṇena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva. Verañjāyaṃ jāto, verañjāyaṃ bhavo, verañjā vā assa nivāsoti verañjo. Mātāpitūhi katanāmavasena panāyaṃ ‘‘udayo’’ti vuccati. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇo, mante sajjhāyatīti attho. Idameva hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttivacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpattā ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti vuccanti.
现在,为了说明毗兰若婆罗门所听到的那件事,(他)说:“沙门确实是乔达摩尊者……”等等。在这里,应当知道“沙门”是因为已经止息了恶。正如经中所说:“舍断了恶的人,称为婆罗门;因为止息了恶,所以称为沙门。”而世尊已经通过无上的圣道止息了恶,因此“沙门”这个称呼,是依照他如实成就的功德而得的。“确实”(khalu)是表示传闻语气的虚词。“贤者”(bho)只是婆罗门种姓的人依其出身而用的称呼方式。巴利
Idāni yamatthaṃ verañjo brāhmaṇo assosi, taṃ pakāsento samaṇo khalu bho gotamotiādimāha. Tattha samitapāpattā samaṇoti veditabbo. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ – ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo (dha. pa. 388), samitapāpattā samaṇoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 265). Bhagavā ca anuttarena ariyamaggena samitapāpo, tenassa yathābhuccaguṇādhigatametaṃ nāmaṃ yadidaṃ samaṇoti. Khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto. Bhoti brāhmaṇajātikānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanamattaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ –
“若有所执著,就只是名义上被称为‘贤者’而已。”这里用“乔达摩”这个姓氏来称扬世尊,所以在“贤者们,据说有位沙门乔达摩”这句话里,应当理解为:“贤者们,据说有位沙门,姓乔达摩。”
“释迦子”则是显示世尊出身于高贵的家族。“从释迦族出家”是显示他依信心而出家,也就是说,他并不是被任何衰败所压倒,也不是因为家道耗尽,而是舍弃了那个家族,依信心而出家。这之后所说的,意思和前面一样。“那位”(taṃ kho pana)是表示“如此这般情形”的宾格,意思是“那位乔达摩尊”。“善”是指具足善的功德,意思是“最胜”。“称誉之声”就是称誉本身,或者说是赞叹的声音。巴利
‘‘Bhovādī nāmaso hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti. (Dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Gotamoti bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikitteti, tasmā ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo’’ti ettha samaṇo kira bho gotamagottoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Sakyaputtoti idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulaparidīpanaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ, kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva, taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāya pabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato paraṃ vuttatthameva. Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato; seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kitti eva, thutighoso vā.
在“彼世尊即是阿拉汉”等句中,先这样理解其关联:这位世尊,正因为这样那样的原因,才被称为“即是阿拉汉,即是正自觉者……乃至即是世尊”。巴利
Itipi so bhagavātiādīsu pana ayaṃ tāva yojanā – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了让持律者精通经教的义理,在开始注释律藏时,我要用与佛功德相应的如法言谈,使他们的心生起欢喜,因此对这些词句按广说的方式加以解释。所以,对于所说的“彼世尊即是应供”等话,其中首先应当知道,彼世尊依以下这些理由而被称为应供:因为远离,因为已摧毁诸敌与诸辐,因为值得受用资具等,因为在作恶时没有隐秘。确实,他远离一切烦恼,安住在极其遥远之处,因为已用道彻底摧毁了连同习气在内的诸烦恼,所以因远离而称为应供;那些烦恼之敌已被他用道摧毁,所以也因已摧毁诸敌而称为应供。还有,那以无明、有渴爱为毂,以福等行为辐,以老死为辋,以漏集为轴,贯穿连接在三有之车上的无始轮回之轮,他在菩提树下,以精进之足立于戒地之上,以信之手拿起能灭尽业的智斧,摧毁了它的一切辐,所以也因已摧毁诸辐而称为应供。巴利
Idāni vinayadharānaṃ suttantanayakosallatthaṃ vinayasaṃvaṇṇanārambhe buddhaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya cittasampahaṃsanatthañca etesaṃ padānaṃ vitthāranayena vaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Tasmā yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘so bhagavā itipi araha’’ntiādi; tattha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbo. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito, maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti ārakattā arahaṃ; te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ. Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññādiabhisaṅkhārāraṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakaraṃ ñāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arānaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ.
或者,“轮回之轮”指的是无始以来轮回的流转。在这个轮子里,无明是轮毂,因为它是根本;老死是轮辋,因为它是终点;其余十法则是轮辐,因为它们都以无明为根本、以老死为终点。其中,对苦等法的无知就是无明。在欲有中,无明是欲有诸行的缘;在色有中,无明是色有诸行的缘;在无色有中,无明是无色有诸行的缘。在欲有中,诸行是欲有结生识的缘;其余情况也照这样类推。在欲有中,结生识是欲有名色的缘;色有中也一样。在无色有中,结生识只是名的缘。在欲有中,名色是欲有六处的缘。在色有中,名色是色有三处的缘。在无色有中,名是无色有一处的缘。在欲有中,六处是欲有六种触的缘。在色有中,三处是色有三种触的缘;在无色有中,一处是无色有一种触的缘。在欲有中,六触是欲有六种受的缘。在色有中,三触是色有三种受的缘;在无色有中,一触是无色有一种受的缘。在欲有中,六受是欲有六种渴爱聚的缘。在色有中,三受是色有三种渴爱聚的缘;在无色有中,一受是无色有一种渴爱聚的缘。在每一种情况里,对应的渴爱就是对应取的缘;取等则是诸有等的缘。巴利
Atha vā saṃsāracakkanti anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃ vuccati, tassa ca avijjā nābhi, mūlattā; jarāmaraṇaṃ nemi, pariyosānattā; sesā dasa dhammā arā, avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā ca. Tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ avijjā, kāmabhave ca avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave avijjā rūpabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave avijjā arūpabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave saṅkhārā kāmabhave paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayā honti. Esa nayo itaresu. Kāmabhave paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ kāmabhave nāmarūpassa paccayo hoti, tathā rūpabhave. Arūpabhave nāmasseva paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave nāmarūpaṃ kāmabhave saḷāyatanassa paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave nāmarūpaṃ rūpabhave tiṇṇaṃ āyatanānaṃ paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave nāmaṃ arūpabhave ekassāyatanassa paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave saḷāyatanaṃ kāmabhave chabbidhassa phassassa paccayo hoti. Rūpabhave tīṇi āyatanāni rūpabhave tiṇṇaṃ phassānaṃ; arūpabhave ekamāyatanaṃ arūpabhave ekassa phassassa paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave cha phassā kāmabhave channaṃ vedanānaṃ paccayā honti. Rūpabhave tayo tattheva tissannaṃ; arūpabhave eko tattheva ekissā vedanāya paccayo hoti. Kāmabhave cha vedanā kāmabhave channaṃ taṇhākāyānaṃ paccayā honti. Rūpabhave tisso tattheva tiṇṇaṃ; arūpabhave ekā vedanā arūpabhave ekassa taṇhākāyassa paccayo hoti. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhā tassa tassa upādānassa paccayo; upādānādayo bhavādīnaṃ.
怎么讲呢?这里有一种人,心想“我要享受各种欲乐”,就以对欲乐的执取为条件,用身体做坏事,用语言做坏事,用内心做坏事;因为坏事做尽了,就投生到恶道里去。在那里,作为他投生原因的业,就是业有;由业所生出来的诸蕴,就是生有;诸蕴的生起,就是生;成熟,就是老;坏灭,就是死。巴利
Kathaṃ? Idhekacco ‘‘kāme paribhuñjissāmī’’ti kāmupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ carati, vācāya manasā duccaritaṃ carati; duccaritapāripūriyā apāye upapajjati. Tatthassa upapattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavo, kammanibbattā khandhā upapattibhavo, khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇaṃ.
另有一种人,心想“我要享受天界的福报”,也同样地行善;因为善行圆满,就投生到天界。在那里,作为他投生之因的业,就是业有。道理同样如此。巴利
Aparo ‘‘saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti tatheva sucaritaṃ carati; sucaritapāripūriyā sagge upapajjati. Tatthassa upapattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavoti so eva nayo.
另有一类人,心里想“我要享受梵天界的成就”,就仅仅以欲取为缘而修习慈,修习悲……修习喜……修习舍,因为修习圆满而投生到梵天界。在那里,作为他投生之因的业就是业有,道理和前面一样。巴利
Aparo pana ‘‘brahmalokasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāveti, karuṇaṃ… muditaṃ… upekkhaṃ bhāveti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā brahmaloke nibbattati. Tatthassa nibbattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavoti soyeva nayo.
另有一类人想:“我要体验无色界的成就”,就同样修习空无边处等定,因为修习圆满,便投生到那里。在那里,作为他投生之因的业,就是业有;由业所生的诸蕴,就是生有;诸蕴的生起,就是生;成熟,就是老;坏灭,就是死。这个道理也适用于其余以取为根本的组配。巴利
Aparo ‘‘arūpavabhasampattiṃ anubhavissāmī’’ti tatheva ākāsānañcāyatanādisamāpattiyo bhāveti, bhāvanāpāripūriyā tattha nibbattati. Tatthassa nibbattihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ kammabhavo, kammanibbattā khandhā upapattibhavo, khandhānaṃ nibbatti jāti, paripāko jarā, bhedo maraṇanti. Esa nayo sesupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu.
就这样:“这是无明为因,诸行由因所生,这两者都是由因所生”——在把握缘时生起的慧,就是法住智;对过去时也是如此,对未来时也是如此:“无明为因,诸行由因所生,这两者都是由因所生”——在把握缘时生起的慧,就是法住智。应当按这个方式把一切句都展开来说。其中,无明和行是一组,识、名色、六处、触、受是一组,渴爱、取、有是一组,生、老死是一组。这里,第一组是过去时,中间两组是现在时,生和老死是未来时。而且,这里通过把握无明和行,就已经把握了渴爱、取、有,所以这五法属于过去的业轮转;识等五法属于现在的果轮转。通过把握渴爱、取、有,就已经把握了无明和行,所以这五法属于现在的业轮转;由于以生、老死的名义指出了识等,所以这五法属于未来的果轮转。它们按行相来分有二十种。这里,行和识之间有一个连接,受和渴爱之间有一个连接,有和生之间有一个连接。就这样,对于这个具备四组、三世、二十行相、三个连接的缘起,世尊以一切行相了知、照见、遍知、通达。这里,以“已知”之义为智,以“了知”之义为慧,因此说:“把握缘时之慧,即是法住智。”以这个法住智,世尊如实了知那些法之后,对它们厌离、离染、解脱,把这如此运转的轮回之轮辐击破、摧毁、消灭。这样,也因摧毁了轮辐,所以是阿拉汉。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ; atītampi addhānaṃ, anāgatampi addhānaṃ; avijjā hetu, saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā, ubhopete hetusamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti etena nayena sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni. Tattha avijjā saṅkhārā eko saṅkhepo, viññāṇa-nāmarūpa-saḷāyatana-phassa-vedanā eko, taṇhupādānabhavā eko, jāti-jarā-maraṇaṃ eko. Purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā, dve majjhimā paccuppanno, jātijarāmaraṇaṃ anāgato. Avijjāsaṅkhāraggahaṇena cettha taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva hontīti ime pañca dhammā atīte kammavaṭṭaṃ; viññāṇādayo pañca dhammā etarahi vipākavaṭṭaṃ. Taṇhupādānabhavaggahaṇena avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva hontīti ime pañca dhammā etarahi kammavaṭṭaṃ; jātijarāmaraṇāpadesena viññāṇādīnaṃ niddiṭṭhattā ime pañca dhammā āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭaṃ. Te ākārato vīsatividhā honti. Saṅkhāraviññāṇānañcettha antarā eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantarā eko, bhavajātīnamantarā eko. Iti bhagavā evaṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ, tiyaddhaṃ, vīsatākāraṃ, tisandhiṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ sabbākārato jānāti passati aññāti paṭivijjhati. Taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññā. Tena vuccati – ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti. Iminā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇena bhagavā te dhamme yathābhūtaṃ ñatvā tesu nibbindanto virajjanto vimuccanto vuttappakārassa imassa saṃsāracakkassa are hani vihani viddhaṃsesi. Evampi arānaṃ hatattā arahaṃ.
因为是最上应供,他堪受衣服等资具和殊胜的供养;也正因如此,当如来出现于世时,任何有大威力的天与人都不在别处行供养。就像娑婆主梵天以须弥山那么大的宝鬘供养如来,其他天与人,如频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王等,也各尽所能地供养。而阿育大王为了纪念已般涅槃的世尊,舍出九十六俱胝的财富,在整个赡部洲建立了八万四千座寺院,更何况其他种种殊胜供养呢!这样,也因堪受资具等的缘故,称为阿拉汉。再者,就像世间有些自以为聪明的愚人,因为害怕恶名而暗中作恶;而此人任何时候都不这样做,因此也因没有隐秘作恶的缘故,称为阿拉汉。在这里有偈颂:巴利
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye arahati pūjāvisesañca; teneva ca uppanne tathāgate ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā na te aññattha pūjaṃ karonti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññepi devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ visajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti! Evaṃ paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ. Yathā ca loke keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti; evamesa na kadāci karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ. Hoti cettha –
“ 因为已经远离,并且已经杀灭烦恼之敌,所以他才被称为牟尼。
已摧破轮回之轮,堪受资具等供养,
他不于隐秘处造恶,以此故名为‘阿拉汉’。”巴利
‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti.
他因为自己正确地、完全地觉悟了一切法,所以被称为正自觉者。也就是说,他确实对一切法都正确地、完全地觉悟了:对应当证知的法,他觉悟为应当证知;对应当遍知的法,他觉悟为应当遍知;对应当断除的法,他觉悟为应当断除;对应当作证的法,他觉悟为应当作证;对应当修习的法,他觉悟为应当修习。正因如此,他说:巴利
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddho. Tathā hesa sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato buddho, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato. Teneva cāha –
“ 应当证知的已经证知,应当修习的也已经修习;
应当断除的,我已经断除了,所以,婆罗门,我是觉者。”巴利
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 563);
另外,眼是苦谛;以它为根本因、能令它生起的过去渴爱是集谛;二者不再生起是灭谛;了知灭的道是道谛。像这样,即使以逐项推演的方式,他也正确地、自己觉悟了一切法。这个道理也适用于耳、鼻、舌、身、意。按照同样的方式,应当把色等六处、眼识等六识身、眼触等六触、眼触所生受等六受、色想等六想、色思等六思、色渴爱等六渴爱身、色寻等六寻、色伺等六伺、色蕴等五蕴、十遍、十随念、膨胀相等十种想、发等三十二身分、十二处、十八界、欲有等九有、初禅等四禅、慈修习等四无量、四无色等至,以及逆观老死等、顺观无明等缘起支,都这样配列。巴利
Apica cakkhu dukkhasaccaṃ, tassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena taṃsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccanti evaṃ ekekapaduddhārenāpi sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho. Esa nayo sota-ghāna-jivhā-kāyamanesupi. Eteneva nayena rūpādīni cha āyatanāni, cakkhuviññāṇādayo cha viññāṇakāyā, cakkhusamphassādayo cha phassā, cakkhusamphassajādayo cha vedanā, rūpasaññādayo cha saññā, rūpasañcetanādayo cha cetanā, rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā, rūpavitakkādayo cha vitakkā, rūpavicārādayo cha vicārā , rūpakkhandhādayo pañcakkhandhā, dasa kasiṇāni, dasa anussatiyo, uddhumātakasaññādivasena dasa saññā, kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, kāmabhavādayo nava bhavā, paṭhamādīni cattāri jhānāni, mettābhāvanādayo catasso appamaññā, catasso arūpasamāpattiyo, paṭilomato jarāmaraṇādīni, anulomato avijjādīni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgāni ca yojetabbāni.
这里有一个逐词配对的说明:老死是苦谛,生是集谛,两者的出离是灭谛,了知灭的道是道谛。就这样,他以逐词推演的方式,对一切法自己正确地觉悟、随觉、通达。因此说:因为他自己正确地觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ekapadayojanā – ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, jāti samudayasaccaṃ, ubhinnampi nissaraṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhappajānanā paṭipadā maggasacca’’nti. Evaṃ ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme sammā sāmañca buddho anubuddho paṭividdho. Tena vuttaṃ – sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā pana sammāsambuddhoti.
因为具足了明与行,所以称为明行具足。其中,明有三种明,也有八种明。三种明应当依照《怖畏经》(中部1.34等)所说的方法来理解,八种明则依照《安巴塔经》(长部1.278等)来理解。在那部经里,把观智和意所成神通,连同六种神通合在一起,就说了八种明。行是指:戒律的防护、守护根门、饮食知量、警寤精勤、七种正法、四种色界禅那——应当知道这十五法就是行。正因为圣弟子以这十五法而行,走向不死之境,所以称为行。正如经中所说:“玛哈那玛,在这里,圣弟子具足戒……”(中部2.24)等广说。世尊具足这些明和这个行,因此称为明行具足。其中,明具足使世尊圆满了一切知智,行具足成就了他的大悲。他以一切知智了知一切众生的利益与损害,以大悲心避开损害而引导他们进入利益,正如一位明行具足者所应有的样子。因此,他的弟子们修行善巧,而非修行不善;那些明行缺失者的弟子则不然,就像自苦行者等人一样。巴利
Vijjāhi pana caraṇena ca sampannattā vijjācaraṇasampanno; tattha vijjāti tissopi vijjā, aṭṭhapi vijjā. Tisso vijjā bhayabheravasutte (ma. ni. 1.34 ādayo) vuttanayeneva veditabbā, aṭṭha vijjā ambaṭṭhasutte (dī. ni. 1.278 ādayo). Tatra hi vipassanāñāṇena manomayiddhiyā ca saha cha abhiññā pariggahetvā aṭṭha vijjā vuttā. Caraṇanti sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānānīti ime pannarasa dhammā veditabbā. Imeyeva hi pannarasa dhammā, yasmā etehi carati ariyasāvako gacchati amataṃ disaṃ tasmā, caraṇanti vuttā. Yathāha – ‘‘idha, mahānāma, ariyasāvako sīlavā hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.24) vitthāro. Bhagavā imāhi vijjāhi iminā ca caraṇena samannāgato, tena vuccati vijjācaraṇasampannoti . Tattha vijjāsampadā bhagavato sabbaññutaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā, caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ. So sabbaññutāya sabbasattānaṃ atthānatthaṃ ñatvā mahākāruṇikatāya anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojeti, yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampanno. Tenassa sāvakā suppaṭipannā honti no duppaṭipannā, vijjācaraṇavipannānañhi sāvakā attantapādayo viya.
因为行走美妙,因为到达了美妙之处,因为正确地到来,也因为正确地说话,所以称为善逝。行走本身也被称为“逝”,而世尊的行走是美妙的、清净的、无可指责的。那是什么呢?就是圣道。依靠这种行走,他毫无阻碍地到达了安稳的方向,所以因行走美妙而称为善逝。他又到达了美妙之处——不死的涅槃,所以因到达美妙之处也称为善逝。他又正确地行走,对于各道所断除的烦恼,不再退转回来。这也是曾经说过的:“以入流道所断除的烦恼,他不再返回那些烦恼、不再退回、不再转来,所以称为善逝……乃至……以阿拉汉道所断除的烦恼,他不再返回那些烦恼、不再退回、不再转来,所以称为善逝。”(大义释38)他又因为正确地到来而称为善逝:从燃灯佛足下开始,直到菩提座,他圆满三十种巴拉密,以正确的修行,只做利益安乐一切世间的事,不落入常见、断见、纵欲、自苦这些极端,所以因正确到来也称为善逝。他又正确地说话,在合适的场合只说合适的话,所以因正确说话也称为善逝。巴利
Sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammāgatattā, sammā ca gadattā sugato. Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati, tañca bhagavato sobhanaṃ parisuddhamanavajjaṃ . Kiṃ pana tanti? Ariyamaggo. Tena hesa gamanena khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gatoti sobhanagamanattā sugato. Sundaraṃ cesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbānanti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattāpi sugato. Sammā ca gato tena tena maggena pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato…pe… arahattamaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato’’ti (mahāni. 38). Sammā vā āgato dīpaṅkarapādamūlato pabhuti yāva bodhimaṇḍo tāva samatiṃsapāramipūritāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karonto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime ca ante anupagacchanto āgatoti sammāgatattāpi sugato. Sammā cesa gadati, yuttaṭṭhāne yuttameva vācaṃ bhāsatīti sammā gadattāpi sugato.
关于这一点,有一部能说明问题的经——《中部》2.86:
如果如来知道某句话不真实、不正确、没有利益,而且别人也不喜欢、不中意,如来就不说这句话。如果如来知道某句话真实、正确,但没有利益,而且别人也不喜欢、不中意,如来也不说这句话。如果如来知道某句话真实、正确、有利益,但别人不喜欢、不中意,如来就会判断时机,在适当的时候才说这句话。
如果如来知道某句话不真实、不正确、没有利益,但别人喜欢、中意,如来不说这句话。如果如来知道某句话真实、正确,但没有利益,但别人喜欢、中意,如来也不说这句话。如果如来知道某句话真实、正确、有利益,而且别人也喜欢、中意,如来就会判断时机,在适当的时候才说这句话。
正因为如此正确地说话,所以应当知道他是善逝。巴利
Tatridaṃ sādhakasuttaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāya. Yaṃ tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsati. Yampi tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tampi tathāgato vācaṃ na bhāsati. Yañca kho tathāgato vācaṃ jānāti bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ, sā ca paresaṃ piyā manāpā, tatra kālaññū tathāgato hoti tassā vācāya veyyākaraṇāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.86). Evaṃ sammā gadattāpi sugatoti veditabbo.
因为以一切方式了知世间,所以称为“世间解”。世尊确实从自性、从集、从灭、从趣向灭之道,以一切方式了知、知晓、通达了世间。正如经中所说:“贤友,对于那不生、不老、不死、不逝、不再生的世间边际,我不说靠行走就能知道、见到、到达;贤友,我也不说不到达世间边际就能结束苦。然而,贤友,我就在这一寻长、有想有识的身体上,安立世间、世间集、世间灭,以及趣向世间灭之道。”巴利
Sabbathā viditalokattā pana lokavidū. So hi bhagavā sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyatoti sabbathā lokaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi. Yathāha – ‘‘yattha kho, āvuso, na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati na cavati na upapajjati, nāhaṃ taṃ gamanena lokassa antaṃ ñāteyyaṃ daṭṭheyyaṃ patteyyanti vadāmi; na cāhaṃ, āvuso, appatvāva lokassa antaṃ dukkhassa antakiriyaṃ vadāmi. Api cāhaṃ, āvuso, imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca paññapemi lokasamudayañca lokanirodhañca lokanirodhagāminiñca paṭipadaṃ.
靠走路,永远到不了世间的尽头。
不到达世间的尽头,就无法从苦中解脱。
“ 所以,真正通达世间、具足善慧的人,
已到达世间的尽头,梵行已经圆满。
了知世间边际,并且已经让烦恼止息。
他不贪求这个世间,也不贪求别的世间。”巴利
‘‘Gamanena na pattabbo, lokassanto kudācanaṃ; Na ca appatvā lokantaṃ, dukkhā atthi pamocanaṃ. ‘‘Tasmā have lokavidū sumedho; Lokantagū vusitabrahmacariyo; Lokassa antaṃ samitāvi ñatvā; Nāsīsatī lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.45; saṃ. ni. 1.107);
另外,有三种世间:行世间、有情世间、器世间。其中,在经文说到“一个世间——一切众生依食而住”的地方,应当理解为行世间。在经文说到“世间是常,还是世间是无常”的地方,指的是有情世间。巴利
Apica tayo lokā – saṅkhāraloko, sattaloko, okāsalokoti; tattha ‘‘eko loko – sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112) āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo. ‘‘Sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.421) āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko.
“ 凡日月所及之处,日月遍行诸方,光耀明照。
你的威德遍及这千世界之中。”巴利
‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā, pariharanti disā bhanti virocanā; Tāva sahassadhā loko, ettha te vattatī vaso’’ti. (ma. ni. 1.503) –
在(所引经文的)出处中,“世间”指空间世间;世尊对这一点也以一切方式完全了知。为什么呢?因为经中说:“一世间:一切众生依食而住。二世间:名与色。三世间:三受。四世间:四食。五世间:五取蕴。六世间:六内处。七世间:七识住。八世间:八世间法。九世间:九众生居。十世间:十处。十二世间:十二处。十八世间:十八界。”这行世间也同样被以一切方式完全了知。巴利
Āgataṭṭhāne okāsaloko, tampi bhagavā sabbathā avedi. Tathā hissa – ‘‘eko loko – sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā – nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā – tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā – cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā – pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā – cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā – aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā – nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā – dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā – dvādasāyatanāni . Aṭṭhārasa lokā – aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112). Ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito.
因为他能了知一切众生的宿愿、随眠、习性、意乐,也能了知哪些众生尘垢少、哪些尘垢多,哪些根性锐利、哪些根性迟钝,哪些行为端正、哪些行为不正,哪些容易教化、哪些难以教化,哪些堪能、哪些不堪能,所以他对众生世界也完全了知。就像对众生世界一样,他对器世界也完全了知。也就是说,一个轮围世界,长和宽各是一百二十万三千四百五十由旬。从周围来说——巴利
Yasmā panesa sabbesampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, anusayaṃ jānāti, caritaṃ jānāti, adhimuttiṃ jānāti, apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye bhabbe abhabbe satte jānāti, tasmāssa sattalokopi sabbathā vidito. Yathā ca sattaloko evaṃ okāsalokopi. Tathā hesa ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni tīṇi sahassāni cattāri satāni paññāsañca yojanāni. Parikkhepato –
三百六十万由旬,周匝圆满。
还有一万零三百五十。巴利
Sabbaṃ satasahassāni, chattiṃsa parimaṇḍalaṃ; Dasañceva sahassāni, aḍḍhuḍḍhāni satāni ca.
大地之厚,为二十万又四那由他;
大地即如是计之。巴利
Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā.
Cattāri satasahassāni, aṭṭheva nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, jalaṃ vāte patiṭṭhitaṃ.
风升至虚空,高达九十万;
又有六万,这便是世间的安立。巴利
Navasatasahassāni, māluto nabhamuggato; Saṭṭhi ceva sahassāni, esā lokassa saṇṭhiti.
八万四千由旬,沉入大海之中;
须弥山王,同时高出其量。
此后依次以半半之量,
天界诸物沉升,种种宝石所饰。
持双山、持轴山、郭婆山、善见山;
尼民陀罗山、毗那怛迦山、马耳山——这些大山。
这七座大山,围绕在须弥山四周;
是伟大国王们的住处,天人与夜叉在那里居住。
雪山高达五百由旬,有五座山峰并立;
纵横三千由旬;
由八万四千座峰峦装饰。
名为那伽的树,树干周长十五由旬,
五十由旬的树干,枝条向四周伸展。
它广达一百由旬,而且同样那么高耸起;
阎浮树威德所加,阎浮提洲因之显耀;
八万二千由旬,沉入大海之中。
轮围石山顿时高耸,
周匝环绕那整个世界界而住。巴利
Caturāsīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, sinerupabbatuttamo. Tato upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena, pamāṇena yathākkamaṃ; Ajjhogāḷhuggatā dibbā, nānāratanacittitā. Yugandharo īsadharo, karavīko sudassano; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo girī brahā. Ete satta mahāselā, sinerussa samantato; Mahārājānamāvāsā, devayakkhanisevitā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbato; Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthato; Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍito. Tipañcayojanakkhandha, parikkhepā nagavhayā; Paññāsa yojanakkhandha, sākhāyāmā samantato. Satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā; Jambū yassānubhāvena, jambudīpo pakāsito. Dve asīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, cakkavāḷasiluccayo; Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhito.
在这里,月轮是四十九由旬,日轮是五十由旬,三十三天界是一万由旬;阿修罗界、无间大地狱和阎浮提洲也一样。西牛货洲是七千由旬;东胜身洲也一样。北俱卢洲是八千由旬,而这里每一个大洲都有五百个小洲围绕。这一切合起来就是一个轮围世界、一个世界界,在它们之间的间隙里有世界中间地狱。如此,世尊以无边的佛智了知、遍知、通达了无边的轮围世界、无边的世界界。这样,他对空间世界也完全了知。也正因为如此,他完全了知世间,所以是“世间解”。巴利
Tattha candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojanaṃ; tathā asurabhavanaṃ, avīcimahānirayo, jambudīpo ca. Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanaṃ; tathā pubbavideho. Uttarakuru aṭṭhasahassayojano, ekameko cettha mahādīpo pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāro; taṃ sabbampi ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ , ekā lokadhātu, tadantaresu lokantarikanirayā. Evaṃ anantāni cakkavāḷāni anantā lokadhātuyo bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi, aññāsi, paṭivijjhi. Evamassa okāsalokopi sabbathā vidito. Evampi sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū.
因为没有任何人的功德比他自己更殊胜,所以没有谁比他更高,因此称他为“无上者”。同样,他确实以戒德胜伏一切世间,也以定德……慧德……解脱德……解脱智见德胜伏一切世间;在戒德上无等、与无等者相等、无与伦比、无可匹敌、无有对手……在解脱智见德上也是如此。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,我确实看不到在天界、魔界……乃至天与人之中,有谁在戒德上比我更圆满。”这里应当详细展开。巴利
Attano pana guṇehi visiṭṭhatarassa kassaci abhāvā natthi etassa uttaroti anuttaro. Tathā hesa sīlaguṇenāpi sabbaṃ lokamabhibhavati, samādhi…pe… paññā… vimutti… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenāpi, sīlaguṇenāpi asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggalo…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇenāpi. Yathāha – ‘‘na kho panāhaṃ, bhikkhave, samanupassāmi sadevake loke samārake…pe… sadevamanussāya attanā sīlasampannatara’’nti vitthāro.
同样地,应当详细展开《增上信经》等(增支部4.34;如是语90),以及“我没有师长”等偈颂(中部1.285;大品11)。巴利
Evaṃ aggappasādasuttādīni (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) ‘‘na me ācariyo atthī’’tiādikā gāthāyo (ma. ni. 1.285; mahāva. 11) ca vitthāretabbā.
“调御丈夫”的意思是:引导应受调御的人,这里说的就是调伏和教导。其中,“应受调御的人”指那些还没被调伏、需要被调伏的众生,包括畜生类的人、人类的人、非人的人。比如,世尊调伏过畜生类的人,像龙王阿巴喇拉、小腹龙王龙王、大腹龙王、火顶、烟顶、护财象等,使他们不再有毒害之心,安住在皈依和戒行中。也调伏过人类的人,像萨恰咖尼乾子、青年庵婆咤、波卡拉萨提、索纳丹达、库塔丹达等。还调伏过非人,像夜叉阿罗婆迦、针毛、粗毛、帝释天王等,用种种调伏的方法加以调御和教导。这里应当广引这部经:“凯西,我用柔和的方式调御应受调御的人,也用严厉的方式,也用柔和兼严厉的方式。”(增支部4.111)或者,教导具足净戒等的人进入初禅等,以及为入流者等开示更高的修行道路,这也是对已经调伏的人继续加以调御。巴利
Purisadamme sāretīti purisadammasārathi, dameti vinetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha purisadammāti adantā dametuṃ yuttā tiracchānapurisāpi manussapurisāpi amanussapurisāpi. Tathā hi bhagavatā tiracchānapurisāpi apalāḷo nāgarājā, cūḷodaro, mahodaro, aggisikho, dhūmasikho, dhanapālako hatthīti evamādayo damitā, nibbisā katā, saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā. Manussapurisāpi saccakanigaṇṭhaputta-ambaṭṭhamāṇava-pokkharasāti-soṇadaṇḍakūṭadantādayo. Amanussapurisāpi āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharaloma-yakkha-sakkadevarājādayo damitā vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehi. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho, kesi, purisadammaṃ saṇhenapi vinemi, pharusenapi vinemi, saṇhapharusenapi vinemī’’ti (a. ni. 4.111) idañcettha suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Atha vā visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni sotāpannādīnañca uttarimaggapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanto dantepi dametiyeva.
或者,“无上调御丈夫”这一句本身就是一个完整的意思。因为世尊引导那些应当受调御的人,就像他只要盘腿一坐,那些人就能不执著地奔向八方。因此称为“无上调御丈夫”。这里还应当详细引用这部经:“比丘们,由驯象师调御的象,只朝一个方向奔跑。”(中部3.312)巴利
Atha vā anuttaro purisadammasārathīti ekamevidaṃ atthapadaṃ . Bhagavā hi tathā purisadamme sāreti, yathā ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā aṭṭha disā asajjamānā dhāvanti. Tasmā ‘‘anuttaro purisadammasārathī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Hatthidamakena, bhikkhave, hatthidammo sārito ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvatī’’ti idañcettha suttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.312) vitthāretabbaṃ.
他以适合的方式教导现世与来世的利益以及究竟的利益,所以是导师。再者,他像商队向导一样,所以是导师,世尊就是商队向导。就像商队向导带领商队穿过旷野,穿过有盗贼的旷野,穿过有猛兽的旷野,穿过饥荒的旷野,穿过无水的旷野,让他们渡过、越过、脱离,抵达安稳之地;同样,世尊作为导师、商队向导,带领众生穿过旷野,穿过出生的旷野……按照《大义释》第190节这种详细解释的方式,这里的意思也应当这样理解。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsatīti satthā. Apica satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho. ‘‘Yathā satthavāho satthe kantāraṃ tāreti, corakantāraṃ tāreti, vāḷakantāraṃ tāreti, dubbhikkhakantāraṃ tāreti, nirudakakantāraṃ tāreti, uttāreti nittāreti patāreti khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpeti; evameva bhagavā satthā satthavāho satte kantāraṃ tāreti jātikantāraṃ tāretī’’tiādinā (mahāni. 190) niddesanayenapettha attho veditabbo.
“天人”是指天人和人类,这是按照最高类别的范围来说的,也是按照有能力成就之人的范围来说的。不过,世尊即使对畜生道众生也给予教导,所以他就是导师。因为它们听闻世尊说法后,获得了亲依止缘的成就,凭着这个亲依止缘的成就,在第二生或第三生中就能得到道与果。蟾蜍天子等就是这里的例子。据说,世尊在伽伽拉莲池边为瞻波的居民说法时,一只蟾蜍对世尊的声音产生了取相。一个牧牛童拄着棍子站在那里,把棍子抵在蟾蜍头上。蟾蜍当场命终,投生到三十三天一座十二由旬大的金色天宫里。它就像从睡梦中醒来一样,在那里看到自己被天女众围绕,心想:“咦,我竟然也生到这里来了!我到底做了什么业呢?”它这样思惟时,除了对世尊声音的取相之外,没有看到别的什么善业。它立刻带着天宫前来,用头礼拜世尊的双足。世尊明明知道,却还是问它——巴利
Devamanussānanti daevānañca manussānañca ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ, bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasena ca. Bhagavā pana tiracchānagatānampi anusāsanippadānena satthāyeva. Tepi hi bhagavato dhammasavanena upanissayasampattiṃ patvā tāya eva upanissayasampattiyā dutiye tatiye vā attabhāve maggaphalabhāgino honti. Maṇḍūkadevaputtādayo cettha nidassanaṃ. Bhagavati kira gaggarāya pokkharaṇiyā tīre campānagaravāsīnaṃ dhammaṃ desayamāne eko maṇḍūko bhagavato sare nimittaṃ aggahesi. Taṃ eko vacchapālako daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto tassa sīse sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsi. So tāvadeva kālaṃ katvā tāvatiṃsabhavane dvādasayojanike kanakavimāne nibbatti. Suttappabuddho viya ca tattha accharāsaṅghaparivutaṃ attānaṃ disvā ‘‘are, ahampi nāma idha nibbattosmi! Kiṃ nu kho kammaṃ akāsi’’nti āvajjento nāññaṃ kiñci addasa, aññatra bhagavato sare nimittaggāhā. So taāvadeva saha vimānena āgantvā bhagavato pāde sirasā vandi. Bhagavā jānantova pucchi –
“ 是谁以神通和名声的光辉,向我礼拜双足?
以极其美妙的容色,照亮了一切方向。”
“ 我过去曾是一只青蛙,生活在水里,以水为家;
我在听你说法的时候,被牧牛童打死了。”巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. ‘‘Maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsiṃ, udake vārigocaro; Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassa, avadhi vacchapālako’’ti. (vi. va. 857-858);
世尊为他说法。说法结束时,八万四千有情生起了对法的现观。那位天子也证入入流果,微微一笑就离开了。巴利
Bhagavā tassa dhammaṃ desesi. Desanāvasāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Devaputtopi sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya sitaṃ katvā pakkāmīti.
然而,凡是存在的、可以被称为“应知”的任何法,由于佛陀已以解脱究竟智彻底了知这一切,所以称为佛陀。又因为他自己觉悟了四圣谛,也让其他众生觉悟,因此也以这类理由称为佛陀。为了说明这个含义,应当详细展开《义释》的一切解说方式,即“觉悟诸谛故为佛陀,令众生觉悟故为佛陀”这样的说法,或依《无碍解道》所说。巴利
Yaṃ pana kiñci atthi ñeyyaṃ nāma, tassa sabbassa buddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena buddho. Yasmā vā cattāri saccāni attanāpi bujjhi, aññepi satte bodhesi; tasmā evamādīhipi kāraṇehi buddho. Imassa catthassa viññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’ti evaṃ pavatto sabbopi niddesanayo (mahāni. 192) paṭisambhidānayo (paṭi. ma. 1.162) vā vitthāretabbo.
“世尊”这个称呼,是对具足殊胜功德、在众生中最为尊贵者的敬称。因此,古德们说——巴利
Bhagavāti idaṃ panassa guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 世尊”这个称呼是最殊胜的,“世尊”这个称呼是无上的;
他尊贵,又与恭敬相应,因此被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
名称有四种:依状态而立的、依特征而立的、依标志而立的、无因缘而起的。所谓无因缘而起的名称,用世俗的说法就是“随便叫的”。其中,“牛犊、应调御者、公牛”这一类,是依状态而立的。“持杖者、持伞者、戴冠者、有象者”这一类,是依特征而立的。“三明者、六通者”这一类,是依标志而立的。“吉祥增长者、财富增长者”这一类,是不管词义随便叫出来的,就是无因缘而起的。而“世尊”这个名称是依标志而立的,不是摩诃摩耶起的,不是苏托达那大王起的,不是八万亲族起的,也不是帝释天神、善现等殊胜天人所起的。法将确实这样说过:“世尊——这个名称不是母亲起的……这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下获得一切知智的同时所证得的、以解脱究竟为标志的施设,也就是所谓世尊。”巴利
Catubbidhañhi nāmaṃ – āvatthikaṃ, liṅgikaṃ, nemittikaṃ, adhiccasamuppannanti. Adhiccasamuppannaṃ nāma lokiyavohārena ‘‘yadicchaka’’nti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘vaccho dammo balibaddo’’ti evamādi āvatthikaṃ. ‘‘Daṇḍī chattī sikhī karī’’ti evamādi liṅgikaṃ. ‘‘Tevijjo chaḷabhiñño’’ti evamādi nemittikaṃ. ‘‘Sirivaḍḍhako dhanavaḍḍhako’’ti evamādi vacanatthamanapekkhitvā pavattaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Idaṃ pana bhagavāti nāmaṃ nemittikaṃ, na mahāmāyāya na suddhodanamahārājena na asītiyā ñātisahassehi kataṃ, na sakkasantusitādīhi devatāvisesehi. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā – ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ…pe… vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikāpaññatti, yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 84).
这个以功德为标志而立的名称,为了阐明那些功德,他们说了这首偈颂:巴利
Yaṃguṇanemittikañcetaṃ nāmaṃ, tesaṃ guṇānaṃ pakāsanatthaṃ imaṃ gāthaṃ vadanti –
“ 具福、亲侍、有分、善分别——如是;
摧破诸恶,尊贵者,是具福者。
以众多方法善修自身。
他被称为世尊,因为他已经超越了存在。”巴利
‘‘Bhagī bhajī bhāgī vibhattavā iti; Akāsi bhagganti garūti bhāgyavā; Bahūhi ñāyehi subhāvitattano; Bhavantago so bhagavāti vuccatī’’ti.
而在此,这些词的含义正是应依照《义释》中已说的方法来了知。巴利
Niddese vuttanayeneva cettha tesaṃ tesaṃ padānamattho daṭṭhabbo.
不过,这里还有另一种理解方式:巴利
Ayaṃ pana aparo nayo –
“ 具福者、已破恶者、相应者,以诸分善分别者;
已受用、已舍轮回之行,故于诸有中名为世尊。”巴利
‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti.
在这里,要理解“bhagavā”(世尊)这个称呼:有人抓住“音素增加”和“音素转换”这一词源特征,有人依据语法规则,或者依据“毕苏达罗”等允许插入的构词规则。因为这位佛陀拥有能带来世间与出世间快乐、以布施和持戒等达到彼岸的福德,所以本来应该说“bhāgyavā”(有福者),却被称为“bhagavā”(世尊)。另外,因为他已经摧破了贪、嗔、痴、颠倒作意、无惭、无愧、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、谄、诳、顽固、激烈、慢、过慢、骄、放逸、渴爱、无明、三种不善根、恶行、杂染、垢秽、不平等想、寻思、戏论、四种颠倒、漏、结、暴流、轭、非理趣、渴爱之生起、取、五种心荒芜、束缚、盖、欢喜、六种诤论之根、渴爱身、七种随眠、八种邪道、九种以渴爱为根本的、十种不善业道、见执、一百零八种渴爱行等种种表现,以及一切苦恼、焦灼、十万种烦恼;或者简单地说,他摧破了五种魔——烦恼魔、行魔、蕴魔、死魔、天子魔——因为这些危险都被摧破了,所以本来应该说“bhaggavā”(已摧破者),却被称为“bhagavā”(世尊)。这里有一句话:巴利
Tattha vaṇṇāgamo vaṇṇavipariyayoti etaṃ niruttilakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā saddanayena vā pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā yasmā lokiyalokuttarasukhābhinibbattakaṃ dānasīlādipārappattaṃ bhāgyamassa atthi, tasmā ‘‘bhāgyavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuccatīti ñātabbaṃ. Yasmā pana lobha-dosa-moha-viparītamanasikāra-ahirikānottappa-kodhūpanāha-makkha-paḷāsaissā-macchariya-māyāsāṭheyya-thambha-sārambha-mānātimāna-mada-pamāda-taṇhāvijjā tividhākusalamūla-duccarita-saṃkilesa-mala-visamasaññā-vitakka-papañca-catubbidhavipariyesaāsava-gantha-ogha-yogāgati-taṇhuppādupādāna-pañcacetokhīla-vinibandha-nīvaraṇābhinandanachavivādamūla-taṇhākāya-sattānusaya-aṭṭhamicchatta-navataṇhāmūlaka-dasākusalakama diṭṭhigata-aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabheda-sabbadaratha-pariḷāha-kilesasatasahassāni, saṅkhepato vā pañca kilesa-abhisaṅkhārakhandhamaccu-devaputta-māre abhañji, tasmā bhaggattā etesaṃ parissayānaṃ bhaggavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati. Āha cettha –
“ 贪已破灭,嗔已破灭,痴已破灭,已无诸漏。
他的恶法已被破除,因此被称为世尊。”巴利
‘‘Bhaggarāgo bhaggadoso, bhaggamoho anāsavo; Bhaggāssa pāpakā dhammā, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
由于具足福德,他具足百福生相之色身的圆满得以显示;由于已破除烦恼,法身的成就得以显示。同样,也显示了他:受到世间探究者们的高度尊重,为在家众和出家众所乐于亲近;对前来亲近他的人,他有能力消除他们身心的痛苦,能以财物布施和法布施来利益他们,也有能力使他们与世间和出世间的快乐相连接。巴利
Bhāgyavantatāya cassa satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassa rūpakāyasampattidīpitā hoti, bhaggadosatāya dhammakāyasampatti. Tathā lokiyaparikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvo, gahaṭṭhapabbajitehi abhigamanīyatā, abhigatānañca nesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo, āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā, lokiyalokuttarasukhehi ca sampayojanasamatthatā dīpitā hoti.
因为在世间,“bhaga”这个词用在权势、法、名声、吉祥、欲、精勤这六种事物上。而他在自心中拥有最殊胜的权势,也拥有世间公认的、微细轻快等一切方面都圆满的神通;同样,他拥有出世间法,拥有遍及三界、由如实功德所证得、极为清净的名声,拥有能令见到他色身的人心生净信、四肢百体端庄的吉祥;凡是他对自己或他人所希求、所愿求的,都能如实成就,这就是所谓“所求皆成”的欲;还有以正精勤为一切世间所敬重的因。因此,由于具足这些“bhaga”,他拥有这些“bhaga”,以这个意义而称为“Bhagavā”(世尊)。巴利
Yasmā ca loke issariya-dhamma-yasa-sirī-kāma-payattesu chasu dhammesu bhagasaddo vattati, paramañcassa sakacitte issariyaṃ, aṇimā laghimādikaṃ vā lokiyasammataṃ sabbākāraparipūraṃ atthi tathā lokuttaro dhammo lokattayabyāpako yathābhuccaguṇādhigato ativiya parisuddho yaso, rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭajananayanappasādajananasamatthā sabbākāraparipūrā sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirī, yaṃ yaṃ etena icchitaṃ patthitaṃ attahitaṃ parahitaṃ vā, tassa tassa tatheva abhinipphannattā icchiticchi, tattha nipphattisaññito kāmo, sabbalokagarubhāvappattihetubhūto sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payatto ca atthi; tasmā imehi bhagehi yuttattāpi bhagā assa santīti iminā atthena bhagavāti vuccati.
因为世尊用善、不善等分类来区分一切法,或者用蕴、处、界、谛、根、缘起等来区分善等诸法,又或者以逼迫、有为、热恼、变易的含义来区分苦圣谛,以积集、起因、结合、障碍的含义来区分集谛,以出离、远离、无为、不死的含义来区分灭谛,以出离、因、见、增上的含义来区分道谛——这就是“已分别、已分析、已开显、已宣说”的意思。因此,本来应该说“分别者”的地方,就说成了“世尊”。巴利
Yasmā pana kusalādīhi bhedehi sabbadhamme, khandhāyatana-dhātusacca-indriyapaṭiccasamuppādādīhi vā kusalādidhamme, pīḷana-saṅkhata-santāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhena vā dukkhamariyasaccaṃ, āyūhana-nidāna-saṃyoga-palibodhaṭṭhena samudayaṃ, nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhata-amataṭṭhena nirodhaṃ, niyyāna-hetu-dassanādhipateyyaṭṭhena maggaṃ vibhattavā, vibhajitvā vivaritvā desitavāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā vibhattavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati .
因为这位世尊亲近、奉行、反复修习了天住、梵住、圣住,身远离、心远离、依远离,空、无愿、无相三种解脱,以及其他世间和出世间的上人法,所以,在应当称他为“亲近者”的地方,就称他为 Bhagavā(世尊)。巴利
Yasmā ca esa dibbabrahmaariyavihāre kāyacittaupadhiviveke suññatappaṇihitānimittavimokkhe aññe ca lokiyalokuttare uttarimanussadhamme bhaji sevi bahulamakāsi, tasmā bhattavāti vattabbe bhagavāti vuccati.
因为在这三种存在状态里,被称为渴爱的“去”已经被世尊吐弃了,所以本来应该说“在有中已弃去者”,但人们从“有”(bhava)这个词里取 bha 音,从“去”(gamana)这个词里取 ga 音,从“弃”(vanta)这个词里取 va 音,再把它们拉长,合起来就称为 Bhagavā(世尊)。就像世间本来应该说“mehanassa khassa mālā”,却说成“mekhalā”(腰带)一样。巴利
Yasmā pana tīsu bhavesu taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamanamanena vantaṃ, tasmā bhavesu vantagamanoti vattabbe bhavasaddato bhakāraṃ, gamanasaddato gakāraṃ, vantasaddato vakārañca dīghaṃ katvā ādāya bhagavāti vuccati. Yathā loke ‘‘mehanassa khassa mālā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuccati.
那位世尊“此世间”,就是指世尊这个世间。现在要指出接下来应当说明的内容。“与天一起”就是连同诸天神,叫“俱天”;同样,连同魔叫“俱魔”;连同梵天神叫“俱梵天神”;连同沙门、婆罗门叫“俱沙门婆罗门”;因为被生出来的缘故叫“生类”,就是那生类;连同天和人叫“俱天和人”。其中应当知道,用“俱天”这个词,是收摄五欲界天;用“俱魔”这个词,是收摄第六欲界天;用“俱梵天神”这个词,是收摄梵身天等梵天神众;用“俱沙门婆罗门”这个词,是收摄与教法为敌、为怨家的沙门婆罗门,以及已止息恶行、已除去恶行的沙门婆罗门;用“生类”这个词,是收摄有情世间;用“俱天和人”这个词,是收摄假名天和其余的人。这样,在这里应当知道,用三个词收摄器世间,用两个词从生类的角度收摄有情世间。巴利
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakanti saha devehi sadevakaṃ; evaṃ saha mārena samārakaṃ; saha brahmunā sabrahmakaṃ; saha samaṇabrāhmaṇehi sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ; pajātattā pajā, taṃ pajaṃ; saha devamanussehi sadevamanussaṃ. Tattha sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ, sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena sāsanassa paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇaṃ, samitapāpa-bāhitapāpa-samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇañca, pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇaṃ, sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Evamettha tīhi padehi okāsaloko, dvīhi pajāvasena sattaloko gahitoti veditabbo.
另一种解释:用“俱天”这个说法,涵盖了无色界的天界;用“俱魔”这个说法,涵盖了六欲天的天界;用“俱梵天”这个说法,涵盖了色界的梵天世界;用“俱沙门婆罗门”等说法,按照四众来涵盖假名天和人间,或者涵盖其余的一切有情世界。巴利
Aparo nayo – sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito, samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevalokā, sabrahmakaggahaṇena rūpībrahmaloko, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇādiggahaṇena catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha manussaloko, avasesasabbasattaloko vā.
另外,这里通过“俱天”这一说法,从最高范围的限定,说明即使是一切世间也都已被亲证,因此世尊的称扬之声普遍传开。此后,有些人可能会想:“魔罗有大神通,是六欲天之主、得自在者,难道他也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,所以说“俱魔”。还有些人可能会想:“梵天神有大神通,用一个手指就能让一千个轮围世界充满光明,用两个手指……乃至用十个手指就能让一万个轮围世界充满光明,还能感受无上禅定之乐,难道他也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,所以说“俱梵天神”。此后,有些人可能会想:“那些种种沙门婆罗门是教法的敌人,难道他们也被亲证了吗?”为了消除他们的疑惑,所以说“俱沙门婆罗门及人众”。这样显示了最高中的最高者已被亲证之后,接着又依据假名天和其余人类,按最高范围的限定,说明其余众生世间也已被亲证,所以说“俱天及人”。这就是这里的次第关联。巴利
Apicettha sadevakavacanena ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato sabbassāpi lokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ sādhento tassa bhagavato kittisaddo abbhuggato. Tato yesaṃ siyā – ‘‘māro mahānubhāvo chakāmāvacarissaro vasavattī; kiṃ sopi etena sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto samārakanti abbhuggato. Yesaṃ pana siyā – ‘‘brahmā mahānubhāvo ekaṅguliyā ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷasahasse ālokaṃ pharati, dvīhi…pe… dasahi aṅgulīhi dasasu cakkavāḷasahassesu ālokaṃ pharati, anuttarañca jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, kiṃ sopi sacchikato’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sabrahmakanti abbhuggato. Tato yesaṃ siyā – ‘‘puthūsamaṇabrāhmaṇā sāsanapaccatthikā, kiṃ tepi sacchikatā’’ti? Tesaṃ vimatiṃ vidhamanto sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajanti abbhuggato. Evaṃ ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhānaṃ sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā atha sammutideve avasesamanusse ca upādāya ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sesasattalokassa sacchikatabhāvaṃ pakāsento sadevamanussanti abbhuggato. Ayametthānusandhikkamo.
“自己以殊胜之智亲证之后而宣说”——这里,“自己”就是亲自、不依靠他人;“以殊胜之智”就是以殊胜的智慧,用超胜的智慧了知,这是其含义。“亲证之后”就是现前作证,由此遮止了比量等其他认识方式。“宣说”就是令觉悟、令了知、开示。他宣说初善……乃至……后善的法,就是说,那位世尊因为悲悯众生,即使舍弃了无上的远离之乐,仍然为众生说法。而且无论说少说多,都只是以初善等行相来宣说。巴利
Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ettha pana sayanti sāmaṃ, aparaneyyo hutvā; abhiññāti abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvāti attho. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā, etena anumānādipaṭikkhepo kato hoti. Pavedetīti bodheti ñāpeti pakāseti. So dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca hitvāpi anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti.
怎么讲呢?确实,哪怕只是一首偈颂,由于法本身全然圆满吉祥,第一句就是初善,第二、三句是中善,最后一句是后善。只有一条连贯脉络的经,序分是初善,结分是后善,中间部分是中善。有多条连贯脉络的经,第一条脉络是初善,最后一条脉络是后善,其余脉络是中善。整个教法之法,以自身利益所依的戒为初善,以止、观、道、果为中善,以涅槃为后善。或者以戒和定为初善,以观和道为中善,以果和涅槃为后善。或者以佛陀的善妙正觉为初善,以法的善妙法性为中善,以僧团的善妙修行实践为后善。听了这个法之后,依照它去修行的人所应证得的正觉,以无上正等正觉为初善,以独觉菩提为中善,以声闻菩提为后善。而且,这个法在听闻的时候,仅凭听闻就能镇伏五盖、带来利益,所以是初善;在修行的时候,能带来止观之乐,仅凭修行就能带来利益,所以是中善;这样修行之后,修行之果圆满时,能带来如实安住的状态,仅凭修行之果就能带来利益,所以是后善。又因为以导师为根源,根源清净,所以是初善;义利清净,所以是中善;作用清净,所以是后善。因此应当知道,这位世尊无论说少说多,都是在宣说具有初善等特质的法。巴利
Kathaṃ? Ekagāthāpi hi samantabhadrakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyapādehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimapādena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ paṭhamānusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Sakalopi sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo . Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇavikkhambhanato savanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjiyamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathā paṭipanno ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇo. Nāthappabhavattā ca pabhavasuddhiyā ādikalyāṇo, atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇo , kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Tasmā eso bhagavā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva desetīti veditabbo.
关于“有义、有文”等说法:因为世尊宣说这个法的时候,既开示了教法梵行和道梵行,又用种种方式阐明;而这个法随着其相应的程度,因义理圆满而“有义”,因文句圆满而“有文”。由于具备宣说、开示、揭示、分别、显明、施设以及义理与文句的连接,所以“有义”;由于具足字母、文句、形态、语法、解说的成就,所以“有文”。由于义理深奥和通达深奥,所以“有义”;由于法深奥和说法深奥,所以“有文”。由于属于义无碍解和辩无碍解的范围,所以“有义”;由于属于法无碍解和词无碍解的范围,所以“有文”。由于为智者所感知、令审察的人产生净信,所以“有义”;由于值得信赖、令世间人产生净信,所以“有文”。由于意趣深奥,所以“有义”;由于文句浅显,所以“有文”。因为没有需要添加的东西,以完全圆满的状态而“完全圆满”;因为没有需要去除的东西,以无过失的状态而“完全清净”;因为统摄三学,是梵行已立者、最胜者所应行的,也是他们所行的,所以是“梵行”。因此,被称为“开示有义、有文……梵行”。巴利
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti evamādīsu pana yasmā imaṃ dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti; tañca yathānurūpaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsana-vivaraṇa-vibhajana-uttānīkaraṇa-paññatti-atthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ, akkharapada-byañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Atthagambhīratā-paṭivedhagambhīratāhi sātthaṃ, dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sātthaṃ, dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato parikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ, saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ, uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ; apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ; sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato tesañca cariyabhāvato brahmacariyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
另外,因为世尊在说法时显示法有因有缘、有生起的依据,所以是初善;由于随顺所教化的对象,义理没有颠倒,又具足因由和譬喻,所以是中善;由于能让听众获得信心,并以总结来收尾,所以是后善。这样说法,就是在开示梵行。而这梵行,从修证方面的成就来说,是有义的;从教理传承方面的成就来说,是有文的;因为具备戒等五法蕴,所以是完满圆满的;因为远离烦恼杂染,为了度脱而运作,不依赖世间利养,所以是清净的。从最殊胜的意义上说,因为这是已成为梵者——佛陀、独觉佛、佛陀弟子——所行的,所以称为梵行。因此也说:他宣说初善、中善、后善之法……开示梵行。巴利
Apica yasmā sanidānaṃ sauppattikañca desento ādikalyāṇaṃ deseti, veneyyānaṃ anurūpato atthassa aviparītatāya ca hetudāharaṇayuttato ca majjhekalyāṇaṃ, sotūnaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhena nigamanena ca pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ deseti. Evaṃ desento ca brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti. Tañca paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ, pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ, sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttato kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ, seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakānaṃ cariyato ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuccati. Tasmāpi ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti ādikalyāṇaṃ…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
“萨度,确实”是说:确实美好,能带来利益、带来安乐。“像那样的阿拉汉”:意思是像那位乔达摩尊者那样,以证得如实的功德,而在世间被称作阿拉汉、获得净信的那些阿拉汉。“得以相见”:就是睁开柔和的眼睛,心里这样想:“哪怕只是见上一面,也是好的。”于是,毗兰若婆罗门就前往世尊所在的地方。巴利
Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathārūpānaṃ arahatanti yathārūpo so bhava gotamo, evarūpānaṃ yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddānaṃ arahataṃ. Dassanaṃ hotīti pasādasommāni akkhīni ummīlitvā ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotī’’ti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti.
2 Yena这个词在这里是具格,但用于处格的意义。所以这里的意思应该理解为:世尊在哪里,他就去那里。或者也可以理解为:天与人应该以什么理由去亲近世尊,他就以那个理由去亲近。那么,世尊应该被亲近的理由是什么呢?是为了证得种种殊胜功德,是为了享受美好的果实,就像鸟群总是飞向那棵常年结果的大树一样。“去亲近”说的就是已经去了。“亲近之后”则是说明亲近这个动作已经完成。另一种理解是:这样去了之后,又去到更靠近世尊的地方,也就是到了被称为世尊近处的地方。巴利
2.Yenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā yattha bhagavā tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo . Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena, sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gato tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti.
“与世尊互相问候致意”的意思是:当世尊以“身体还受得了吗”等话问候他时,他也同样对世尊生起了相应的欢喜之情,就像凉水和热水混在一起,变成了一体。而那种以“乔达摩贤者,身体还受得了吗?还能过得去吗?乔达摩贤者您和弟子们是不是少病、少恼、身体轻快、有力气、住得安稳?”这类话进行的交谈,因为能让人生起被称为喜悦和欢悦的欢喜,又因为它是让人欢喜的恰当方式,所以叫“可欢喜的”。它之所以叫“可忆持的”,是因为义理和文辞都很优美,值得让人长久记住、持续不断地流传,也是因为它值得忆念;或者说,听的时候让人感到快乐,所以叫“可欢喜的”,回忆的时候让人感到快乐,所以叫“可忆持的”。同样地,因为文辞清净,所以叫“可欢喜的”;因为义理清净,所以叫“可忆持的”。就这样,他用种种方式进行了可欢喜、可忆持的交谈,把话说完、结束、收尾之后,为了询问自己前来的目的,就坐在一边。巴利
Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodīti yathā khamanīyādīni pucchanto bhagavā tena, evaṃ sopi bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi, sītodakaṃ viya uṇhodakena sammoditaṃ ekībhāvaṃ agamāsi. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci, bho, gotama, khamanīyaṃ; kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci bhoto gotamassa, ca sāvakānañca appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodi, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātaṃ sammodaṃ jananato sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato ca sammodanīyaṃ. Atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ araharūpato saritabbabhāvato ca sāraṇīyaṃ, suyyamānasukhato vā sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato sāraṇīyaṃ. Tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti. Evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ kathaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhāpetvā yenatthena āgato taṃ pucchitukāmo ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
“一边”这个说法,是抽象中性词的表达方式,就像“日月不均匀地运行”等句子里的用法一样。所以这里应该这样理解:他如此坐下,即如同坐者坐在一边那样。或者,这里的“一边”是处格意义的业格用法。“坐下”就是坐下。因为智者男子会走到值得尊敬的人面前,凭着自己懂得坐的规矩,坐在一边。而他就是其中的一位,所以他坐在一边。巴利
Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Tasmā yathā nisinno ekamantaṃ nisinno hoti tathā nisīdīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nisīdīti upāvisi. Paṇḍitā hi purisā garuṭṭhāniyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āsanakusalatāya ekamantaṃ nisīdanti. Ayañca tesaṃ aññataro, tasmā ekamantaṃ nisīdi.
怎样才算“坐在一边”呢?就是避开六种坐姿上的过失。哪六种呢?太远、太近、坐在上风处、坐在高处、坐在正对面、坐在正后方。坐得太远的话,如果想说话,就得大声喊。坐得太近的话,会碰到对方身体。坐在上风处的话,身上的气味会熏到别人。坐在高处的话,显得不恭敬。坐在正对面的话,如果想看对方,就得眼睛直直对着眼睛看。坐在正后方的话,如果想看对方,就得伸长脖子看。所以这位也是避开了这六种坐姿过失才坐下的。因此说“坐在一边”。巴利
Kathaṃ nisinno pana ekamantaṃ nisinno hotīti? Cha nisajjadose vajjetvā. Seyyathidaṃ – atidūraṃ, accāsannaṃ, uparivātaṃ, unnatappadesaṃ, atisammukhaṃ, atipacchāti. Atidūre nisinno hi sace kathetukāmo hoti uccāsaddena kathetabbaṃ hoti. Accāsanne nisinno saṅghaṭṭanaṃ karoti. Uparivāte nisinno sarīragandhena bādhati. Unnatappadese nisinno agāravaṃ pakāseti. Atisammukhā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti, cakkhunā cakkhuṃ āhacca daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Atipacchā nisinno sace daṭṭhukāmo hoti gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhabbaṃ hoti. Tasmā ayampi ete cha nisajjadose vajjetvā nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
坐在一边之后,毗兰若婆罗门对世尊这样说——“此”字现在显示接下来要说的内容。“d”是连音字。“说”就是说了。“我闻”即“我听闻了此事,此事是我所听闻的”,现在显示接下来要说的内容。“贤者乔达摩”是以姓氏称呼世尊。巴利
Ekamantaṃ nisinno kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti etanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ dasseti. Dakāro padasandhikaro. Avocāti abhāsi. Sutaṃ metanti sutaṃ me etaṃ, etaṃ mayā sutanti idāni vattabbamatthaṃ dasseti. Bho gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.
现在,为了说明他所听闻的内容,他开始说“不是沙门乔达摩”等话。这里对其中不明显的词句作解释:“婆罗门”指生来就是婆罗门的人。“老”指衰老、朽坏,因年老而变成牙齿脱落等状态。“年长”指身体各大小肢体已发育到极限。“高龄”指因出身而年高,也就是说已经经历了很长时间。“经久”指已经走过了很长的路程,意思是已经过了两三个王朝的时期。“达至老年”指已经到了最后的年龄阶段,所谓最后的年龄阶段,就是百岁中的最后三分之一。巴利
Idāni yaṃ tena sutaṃ – taṃ dassento na samaṇo gotamoti evamādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – brāhmaṇeti jātibrāhmaṇe. Jiṇṇeti jajjarībhūte jarāya khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ āpādite. Vuḍḍheti aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ vuḍḍhimariyādappatte. Mahallaketi jātimahallakatāya samannāgate, cirakālappasuteti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhagateti addhānaṃ gate , dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atīteti adhippāyo. Vayo anuppatteti pacchimavayaṃ sampatte, pacchimavayo nāma vassasatassa pacchimo tatiyabhāgo.
再者——“老”是指古老,意思是家族传承长久延续。“年长”是指具备戒行等功德的增长。“高龄”是指拥有大财富、大受用,即财富巨大。“经久”是指已踏上道路,即在不违越婆罗门誓愿行持等轨范的情况下而行持。“达至老年”是指已达到出身年长的状态,亦即已达最末的年龄。应知此处应当这样连接理解。巴利
Apica – jiṇṇeti porāṇe, cirakālappavattakulanvayeti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuḍḍheti sīlācārādiguṇavuḍḍhiyutte. Mahallaketi vibhavamahattatāya samannāgate mahaddhane mahābhoge. Addhagateti maggappaṭipanne, brāhmaṇānaṃ vatacariyādimariyādaṃ avītikkamma caramāne. Vayoanuppatteti jātivuḍḍhabhāvaṃ antimavayaṃ anuppatteti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
现在说“礼敬”等语,应当依照前面“沙门乔达摩不……”那里所说的方式连接起来,意义上要这样理解:“他不礼敬,也不从座位起身,也不用‘请诸位尊敬的在这里坐下’这样的话以座位邀请。”这里“或”字是用来显明意义的,就像“色是常或无常”等句子中那样。这样说完之后,看见世尊对自己不做礼敬等行为,便说:“乔达摩尊者,这确实如此。”我先前所听到的那件事确实如此,我的听闻和所见相符一致,在意义上合为一体。他以“乔达摩尊者不……也不以座位邀请”的方式,把自己所听到的归结于所见,带着责备说道:“乔达摩尊者,这并不圆满。”那种不礼敬等的行为,实在是不合理的。巴利
Idāni abhivādetīti evamādīni ‘‘na samaṇo gotamo’’ti ettha vuttanakārena yojetvā evamatthato veditabbāni – ‘‘na vandati vā, nāsanā vuṭṭhahati vā, nāpi ‘idha bhonto nisīdantū’ti evaṃ āsanena vā upanimantetī’’ti. Ettha hi vā saddo vibhāvane nāma atthe, ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’tiādīsu viya. Evaṃ vatvā atha attano abhivādanādīni akarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā āha – ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotama tathevā’’ti. Yaṃ taṃ mayā sutaṃ – taṃ tatheva, taṃ savanañca me dassanañca saṃsandati sameti, atthato ekībhāvaṃ gacchati. ‘‘Na hi bhavaṃ gotamo…pe… āsanena vā nimantetī’’ti evaṃ attanā sutaṃ diṭṭhena nigametvā nindanto āha – ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotama na sampannamevā’’ti taṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ na yuttameva.
这时,世尊没有落入自赞毁他的过失,怀着悲悯清凉的心,为了破除那位婆罗门的无知、显示什么是合理的,便说道:“婆罗门,我不……中略……他的头也会裂开。”这里的大意是:“婆罗门,我用无碍的一切知智之眼观察,在这个包括天界众生的世间里,找不到一个值得我向他问讯、起身迎接、或者请他坐下的众生。这并不奇怪——就算我今天已经证得一切知,也找不到这样一个值得恭敬对待的人。而且,当我刚出生时,朝北走了七步,观察整个一万个世界,那时在这个包括天界众生的世间里,我也找不到一个值得我向他问讯、起身迎接、或者请他坐下的众生。那时,那位活了一万六千劫、已断尽烦恼的大梵天王,合掌对我生起欢喜信心,向我致敬说:‘你是世间的大丈夫,你是包括天界众生的世间中最上、最尊、最胜的,没有人比你更高。’那时我因为看不到有谁比自己更高,便发出狮子吼:‘我是世间最上者,我是世间最尊者,我是世间最胜者。’像这样,即使在我刚出生时,也没有值得我问讯的人,如今我已证得一切知,又该向谁问讯……或者请谁坐下呢?所以,婆罗门,你不要指望如来对你做这样的恭敬举动。婆罗门,如果如来向谁问讯……或者请谁坐下,那个人的头在夜里就会像熟透的椰子从蒂上脱落一样,从脖子上断掉,猛地掉到地上。”巴利
Athassa bhagavā attukkaṃsanaparavambhanadosaṃ anupagamma karuṇāsītalahadayena taṃ aññāṇaṃ vidhamitvā yuttabhāvaṃ dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇa…pe… muddhāpi tassa vipateyyā’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ‘‘ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, appaṭihatena sabbaññutaññāṇacakkhunā olokentopi taṃ puggalaṃ etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke na passāmi, yamahaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṃ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Anacchariyaṃ vā etaṃ, yvāhaṃ ajja sabbaññutaṃ patto evarūpaṃ nipaccakārārahaṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi. Apica kho yadāpāhaṃ sampatijātova uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sakalaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokesiṃ; tadāpi etasmiṃ sadevakādibhede loke taṃ puggalaṃ na passāmi, yamahaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā paccuṭṭheyyaṃ vā āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Atha kho maṃ soḷasakappasahassāyuko khīṇāsavamahābrahmāpi añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘tvaṃ loke mahāpuriso, tvaṃ sadevakassa lokassa aggo ca jeṭṭho ca seṭṭho ca, natthi tayā uttaritaro’’ti sañjātasomanasso patināmesi; tadāpi cāhaṃ attanā uttaritaraṃ apassanto āsabhiṃ vācaṃ nicchāresiṃ – ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti. Evaṃ sampatijātassapi mayhaṃ abhivādanādiraho puggalo natthi, svāhaṃ idāni sabbaññutaṃ patto kaṃ abhivādeyyaṃ vā…pe… āsanena vā nimanteyyaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, mā tathāgate evarūpaṃ nipaccakāraṃ patthayittha. Yañhi, brāhmaṇa, tathāgato abhivādeyya vā…pe… āsanena vā nimanteyya, muddhāpi tassa puggalassa rattipariyosāne paripākasithilabandhanaṃ vaṇṭā pavuttatālaphalamiva gīvato pacchijjitvā sahasāva bhūmiyaṃ vipateyyāti.
3 即使被这样说了,婆罗门还是因为智慧太差,没能看出如来在世间是最尊贵的,只是受不了那番话,就说道:“乔达摩尊者是没味道的人。”据说他心里是这么想的:世间把问讯、起身迎接、合掌、恭敬承事这些做法叫作“和合之味”,而乔达摩尊者没有这些,所以乔达摩尊者是没味道的人,属于没味道的那一类,天性就是没味道。于是世尊为了让他的心变得柔软,避开正面冲突,换一种方式把那句话的意思显示在自己身上,说道:“婆罗门,确实有一种理趣……”巴利
3. Evaṃ vuttepi brāhmaṇo duppaññatāya tathāgatassa loke jeṭṭhabhāvaṃ asallakkhento kevalaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ asahamāno āha – ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti. Ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – yaṃ loke abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalikammasāmīcikammaṃ ‘‘sāmaggiraso’’ti vuccati, taṃ bhoto gotamassa natthi , tasmā arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo, arasajātiko arasasabhāvoti. Athassa bhagavā cittamudubhāvajananatthaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhāvaṃ pariharanto aññathā tassa vacanassatthaṃ attani sandassento ‘‘atthi khvesa brāhmaṇa pariyāyo’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“理趣”指的是原因。因为“理趣”这个词可以用在开示、轮次和原因这三种场合。比如在“你应当把它记作《蜜丸理趣》”这类句子里,它用在开示上;在“阿难,今天轮到谁去教诫诸比丘尼”这类句子里,它用在轮次上;在“萨度,尊者,请世尊开示另一种理趣,好让这个比丘僧团能依另一种理趣而安住”这类句子里,它用在原因上。而在这里,它是用在原因上。所以,这里的含义应当这样理解:婆罗门,确实有这样的原因,凭借这个原因,一个称我为“沙门乔达摩是无味者”的人,可以说是说得正确,可以算作说的是真实之语,而不是虚妄之语。那又是什么原因呢?婆罗门,那些色味……乃至触味,如来已经断除。这话说的是什么意思呢?那些因为出身或因为投生而被公认为最上等的凡夫,在享受、欢喜、贪著色等所缘时,会生起被称为欲乐之味的色味、声味、香味、味味、触味。这些味就像把脖子套住一样,把世间牵引着走;又因为是在依处和所缘等条件和合时生起的,所以称为“和合味”。这一切,如来全都断除了。虽然本该说“我已断除”,但世尊并不以“我的”这种心态抬高自己,而是这样开示法。或者说,这也是世尊开示时的一种善巧。巴利
Tattha pariyāyoti kāraṇaṃ; ayañhi pariyāyasaddo desanā-vāra-kāraṇesu vattati. ‘‘Madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) hi esa desanāyaṃ vattati. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) vāre. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante, bhagavā aññaṃ pariyāyaṃ ācikkhatu, yathāyaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho aññāya saṇṭhaheyyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 164) kāraṇe. Svāyamidha kāraṇe vattati . Tasmā ettha evamattho daṭṭhabbo – atthi kho, brāhmaṇa, etaṃ kāraṇaṃ; yena kāraṇena maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vadamāno puggalo sammā vadeyya, avitathavādīti saṅkhyaṃ gaccheyya. Katamo pana soti? Ye te brāhmaṇa rūparasā…pe… phoṭṭhabbarasā te tathāgatassa pahīnāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ye te jātivasena vā upapattivasena vā seṭṭhasammatānampi puthujjanānaṃ rūpārammaṇādīni assādentānaṃ abhinandantānaṃ rajjantānaṃ uppajjanti kāmasukhassādasaṅkhātā rūparasasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbarasā, ye imaṃ lokaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā viya āviñchanti, vatthārammaṇādisāmaggiyañca uppannattā sāmaggirasāti vuccanti, te sabbepi tathāgatassa pahīnāti. Mayhaṃ pahīnāti vattabbepi mamākārena attānaṃ anukkhipanto dhammaṃ deseti. Desanāvilāso vā esa bhagavato.
在这里,“已断除”是指从心相续中消失、被舍弃。不过在这个意义上,应该把属格理解作具格。以圣道之剑斩断了它们以渴爱和无明为根源的根本,所以叫“根已断”。让它们的根基变得像多罗树的残桩一样,所以叫“如多罗树桩一般”。就像把一棵多罗树连根拔起,只留下一个树桩所在的那块地方,那棵多罗树就再也不会生起来了;同样,以圣道之剑把色味等连根拔起,在心相续中只留下它们过去曾生起过的痕迹,这些就都被称为“如多罗树桩一般”。或者,因为它们的法性已不再生长,就像被砍掉顶端的多罗树一样,所以叫“如多罗树桩一般”。然而,因为这样如多罗树桩一般,它们就成了不存在,也就是说,使它们以后不再存在,所以经文说“已成为不存在”。这里的分词是:anu-abhāvaṃ katā,即 anabhāvaṃkatā。也有读作“anabhāvaṃ gatā”的,意思是“anu-abhāvaṃ gatā”。这里的分词是:anu-abhāvaṃ gatā,即 anabhāvaṃ gatā,就像 anu-acchariyā 即 an-acchariyā 一样。“未来不再生起的法”是指未来不再生起的自性。既然已经达到不存在,它们怎么还会再生起呢?所以说“已达到不存在,未来不再生起的法”。巴利
Tattha pahīnāti cittasantānato vigatā jahitā vā. Etasmiṃ panatthe karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ariyamaggasatthena ucchinnaṃ taṇhāvijjāmayaṃ mūlametesanti ucchinnamūlā. Tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā. Yathā hi tālarukkhaṃ samūlaṃ uddharitvā tassa vatthumatte tasmiṃ padese kate na puna tassa tālassa uppatti paññāyati; evaṃ ariyamaggasatthena samūle rūpādirase uddharitvā tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate sabbepi te ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Avirūḷhidhammattā vā matthakacchinnatālo viya katāti tālāvatthukatā. Yasmā pana evaṃ tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā honti, yathā nesaṃ pacchābhāvo na hoti, tathā katā honti; tasmā āha – ‘‘anabhāvaṃkatā’’ti. Ayañhettha padacchedo – anuabhāvaṃ katā anabhāvaṃkatāti. ‘‘Anabhāvaṃ gatā’’tipi pāṭho, tassa anuabhāvaṃ gatāti attho. Tattha padacchedo anuabhāvaṃ gatā anabhāvaṃ gatāti, yathā anuacchariyā anacchariyāti. Āyatiṃ anuppādadhammāti anāgate anuppajjanakasabhāvā. Ye hi abhāvaṃ gatā, te puna kathaṃ uppajjissanti? Tenāha – ‘‘anabhāvaṃ gatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti.
婆罗门,这就是“理趣”的意思:婆罗门,这就是那个理由,凭它如实地说我,可以说“沙门乔达摩是无味者”。但你所指的那个,并不是理趣。世尊为什么这样说呢?这样说的时候,难道不是承认了婆罗门所说的“和合味”在自身中存在吗?回答说:并非如此。因为,如果有人有能力做出那种和合味却不去做,他才能因为没有这种和合味而被称为无味者。可是世尊根本没有能力做那件事。所以,为了表明他在做那件事上是无能的,世尊才说“但你所指的那个并不是”。你依据某个理趣而称我为“无味者”,那个理趣在我们这里根本说不通。巴利
Ayaṃ kho brāhmaṇa pariyāyoti idaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, kāraṇaṃ yena maṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyya ‘‘arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo’’ti. No ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesīti yañca kho tvaṃ sandhāya vadesi, so pariyāyo na hoti. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāha? Nanu evaṃ vutte yo brāhmaṇena vutto sāmaggiraso tassa attani vijjamānatā anuññātā hotīti. Vuccate, na hoti. Yo hi taṃ sāmaggirasaṃ kātuṃ bhabbo hutvā na karoti, so tadabhāvena arasarūpoti vattabbo bhaveyya. Bhagavā pana abhabbova etaṃ kātuṃ, tenassa karaṇe abhabbataṃ pakāsento āha – ‘‘no ca kho yaṃ tvaṃ sandhāya vadesī’’ti. Yaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya tvaṃ maṃ ‘‘arasarūpo’’ti vadesi, so amhesu neva vattabboti.
4 婆罗门这样无法把自己心里认定的“无味”强加到世尊身上,于是又说了“乔达摩尊者是无所受用的人”等等。在这里的一切说法中,都应该按照前面已经讲过的方式理解连接的顺序,并明白那只是针对某种特定含义而说的。婆罗门以为,世间对年长者行礼等做法就是和合共处的受用,因为世尊没有这些行为,就说世尊是无所受用的人。但世尊观察到,众生对色等事物生起的欲贪受用,在自己身上并不存在,因此又认可了另一种因缘。巴利
4. Evaṃ brāhmaṇo attanā adhippetaṃ arasarūpataṃ āropetuṃ asakkonto athāparaṃ nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha. Sabbapariyāyesu cettha vuttanayeneva yojanakkamaṃ viditvā sandhāya bhāsitamattaṃ evaṃ veditabbaṃ. Brāhmaṇo tameva vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanakammādiṃ loke sāmaggiparibhogoti maññamāno tadabhāvena bhagavantaṃ nibbhogoti āha. Bhagavā pana yvāyaṃ rūpādīsu sattānaṃ chandarāgaparibhogo tadabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
5 婆罗门看到世间人对年长者行礼等家族习俗,世尊却不做这些事,就说世尊是“无作论者”。但世尊既然宣说不造身恶行等,就是认可自己持有这种无作论,所以又开许了另一种说法。其中,身恶行应当理解为杀生、不与取、邪淫的思;语恶行应当理解为妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语的思;意恶行应当理解为贪求、嗔恚、邪见。除了这些法,其余的不善法应当理解为“种种恶不善法”。巴利
5. Puna brāhmaṇo yaṃ loke vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikulasamudācārakammaṃ lokiyā karonti tassa akiriyaṃ sampassamāno bhagavantaṃ akiriyavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana, yasmā kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ akiriyaṃ vadati tasmā, taṃ akiriyavādaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tattha ca kāyaduccaritanti pāṇātipāta-adinnādāna-micchācāracetanā veditabbā. Vacīduccaritanti musāvāda-pisuṇavācā-pharusavācā-samphappalāpacetanā veditabbā. Manoduccaritanti abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiyo veditabbā. Ṭhapetvā te dhamme, avasesā akusalā dhammā ‘‘anekavihitā pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’ti veditabbā.
6 婆罗门又因为看不到世尊有敬礼等行为,就以为“依靠这个,世间的传统就断绝了”,于是说世尊是断灭论者。但世尊宣说:八种与贪俱行的心中的五种欲贪,以及在两种不善心中生起的嗔恚,都以不来道断除;作为一切不善之根源的无余痴,以阿拉汉道断除;除了这三种,对其余的恶不善法,则宣说各随其宜,以四道断除。因此,他见自身有此断灭论,便认可了另一种说法。巴利
6. Puna brāhmaṇo tameva abhivādanādikammaṃ bhagavati apassanto imaṃ ‘‘āgamma ayaṃ lokatanti lokapaveṇī ucchijjatī’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ ucchedavādoti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa dvīsu akusalacittesu uppajjamānakadosassa ca anāgāmimaggena ucchedaṃ vadati. Sabbākusalasambhavassa pana niravasesassa mohassa arahattamaggena ucchedaṃ vadati. Ṭhapetvā te tayo, avasesānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathānurūpaṃ catūhi maggehi ucchedaṃ vadati; tasmā taṃ ucchedavādaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
7 婆罗门又想:“看来沙门乔达摩是厌恶对年长者行礼这类家族习俗,所以才不做的。”他这样想着,便称世尊为“厌恶者”。但世尊之所以厌恶,是因为厌恶身恶行等。这话是什么意思呢?三种身恶行、四种语恶行、三种意恶行,以及除了这些恶行之外,其余那些因低劣而称为恶、因从不善巧生起而称为不善的诸法——对它们的等至、入定、具足,这一切,就像爱打扮的人厌恶、羞耻粪便一样,世尊也厌恶、羞耻它们。因此,他观察到自身具有这种对所厌恶之事的厌恶,便认可了另一层含义。其中,“以身恶行”应看作具格,表示所厌恶的对象。巴利
7. Puna brāhmaṇo ‘‘jigucchati maññe samaṇo gotamo idaṃ vayovuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikulasamudācārakammaṃ, tena taṃ na karotī’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ jegucchīti āha. Bhagavā pana yasmā jigucchati kāyaduccaritādīhi; kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti ? Yañca tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ, yañca catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ, yañca tividhaṃ manoduccaritaṃ, yā ca ṭhapetvā tāni duccaritāni avasesānaṃ lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakānaṃ akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpatti samāpajjanā samaṅgibhāvo, taṃ sabbampi gūthaṃ viya maṇḍanakajātiyo puriso jigucchati hirīyati, tasmā taṃ jegucchitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tattha ‘‘kāyaduccaritenā’’ti upayogatthe karaṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
8 婆罗门又看不到世尊做敬礼等行为,就心想:“这个人是在铲除、破坏世间尊长的规矩;或者说,因为他不做这些合宜的事,所以这个人应该被调伏、应该被责罚。”他这样想着,就称世尊为“应调伏者”。这里的词义是:能调伏,就是调伏者,也就是破坏者的意思。有调伏,就是应被调伏者,或者说应受调伏,也就是应受责罚。然而世尊因为为调伏、平息贪等烦恼而说法,所以是应调伏者。这里真正的词义是:为调伏而说法,所以是应调伏者。派生词的用法确实多种多样!世尊在自己身上看到这应调伏者的含义,便认可了另一种解释。巴利
8. Puna brāhmaṇo tameva abhivādanādikammaṃ bhagavati apassanto ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ lokajeṭṭhakakammaṃ vineti vināseti, atha vā yasmā etaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ na karoti tasmā ayaṃ vinetabbo niggaṇhitabbo’’ti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ venayikoti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – vinayatīti vinayo, vināsetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayo eva venayiko, vinayaṃ vā arahatīti venayiko, niggahaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavā pana, yasmā rāgādīnaṃ vinayāya vūpasamāya dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā venayiko hoti. Ayameva cettha padattho – vinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti venayiko. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti! Svāyaṃ taṃ venayikabhāvaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti.
9 婆罗门又想:做敬礼等合宜行为的人,能让年长者满意、欢喜;不做的人,却让他们苦恼、烦扰,使他们心生忧恼。而世尊不做这些行为。所以他心里想:“这个人是在让年长者受苦。”或者因为世尊不具备善士的品行,他想:“这是个可怜人。”于是他对世尊说:“这位是苦行僧。”这里的词义是:令人苦恼,就是“苦行”,意思是激怒、伤害,这是针对不做合宜行为而说的名称。有这种苦行的人,就是“苦行僧”。在第二种不抠字面的解释里,世间把可怜人叫作“苦行僧”。但世尊已经断除了那些不善法——它们因为令世间苦恼而被称为“应被苦迫”的法——所以被称为苦行僧。因此,他观察到自身具备这种苦行僧的含义,也就认可了另一层解释。这里的词义是:令人苦恼的法,就是“苦”,这是不善法的别名。正如经中所说:“今生受苦,死后也受苦。”同样,他已经断除、驱逐、舍弃、摧毁了那些苦,所以是苦行僧。巴利
9. Puna brāhmaṇo yasmā abhivādanādīni sāmīcikammāni karontā vayovuḍḍhe tosenti hāsenti, akarontā pana tāpenti vihesenti domanassaṃ nesaṃ uppādenti, bhagavā ca tāni na karoti; tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ vayovuḍḍhe tapatī’’ti maññamāno sappurisācāravirahitattā vā ‘‘kapaṇapuriso aya’’nti maññamāno bhagavantaṃ tapassīti āha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – tapatīti tapo, roseti vihesetīti vuttaṃ hoti, sāmīcikammākaraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tapo assa atthīti tapassī. Dutiye atthavikappe byañjanāni avicāretvā loke kapaṇapuriso ‘‘tapassī’’ti vuccati. Bhagavā pana ye akusalā dhammā lokaṃ tapanato tapanīyāti vuccanti, tesaṃ pahīnattā yasmā tapassīti saṅkhyaṃ gato, tasmā taṃ tapassitaṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – tapantīti tapā, akusaladhammānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘idha tappati pecca tappatī’’ti. Tathā te tape assi nirassi pahāsi viddhaṃsesīti tapassī.
10 那位婆罗门又以为,礼敬等行为能带来天界胎藏的成就、获得在天界的结生,而他在世尊身上看不到这些,便说世尊是“无胎者”。他也可能是出于愤怒,为了指出世尊在母胎中结生这件事上有过失,才这样说。这里的词义是:“无胎者”即从胎中离去的人,意思是说他没有能力获得天界转生。或者,“无胎者”是指他的胎藏低劣,因为他被排除在天界胎藏之外,将来只会得到低劣的胎;又或者,意思是他在母胎中的胎居很低劣。然而,世尊因为将来已不再有胎居,所以自己观察到这种“无胎”的性质,也就认可了另一种解释。其中,“婆罗门,若有人将来的胎居、后有的再生已被断除”这几句,应当这样理解:婆罗门,若有人将来的胎居和后有的再生,因为以无上道断除了它们的因,所以已被断除。这里用“胎居”一词涵盖了胎生,用“后有的再生”一词涵盖了其余三种生。巴利
10. Puna brāhmaṇo taṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ devalokagabbhasampattiyā devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāya saṃvattatīti maññamāno bhagavati cassa abhāvaṃ disvā bhagavantaṃ apagabbhoti āha. Kodhavasena vā bhagavato mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassentopi evamāha. Tatrāyaṃ padattho – gabbhato apagatoti apagabbho, abhabbo devalokūpapattiṃ pāpuṇitunti adhippāyo. Hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbho, devalokagabbhaparibāhirattā āyatiṃ hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgīti, hīno vāssa mātukucchimhi gabbhavāso ahosīti adhippāyo. Bhagavato pana yasmā āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā apagatā, tasmā so taṃ apagabbhataṃ attani sampassamāno aparampi pariyāyaṃ anujānāti. Tatra ca yassa kho brāhmaṇa āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbatti pahīnāti etesaṃ padānaṃ evamattho daṭṭhabbo – brāhmaṇa, yassa puggalassa anāgate gabbhaseyyā, punabbhave ca abhinibbatti anuttarena maggena vihatakāraṇattā pahīnāti. Gabbhaseyyaggahaṇena cettha jalābujayoni gahitā. Punabbhavābhinibbattiggahaṇena itarā tissopi.
另外,这里的“胎居”就是指在胎中的住处,“后有”本身就是再生,所以“后有之再生”就是这个意思。正如虽然说“识住”,但并不是在识之外另有一个住;同样,这里也应该知道,并不是在胎之外另有一个居处。再者,所谓再生,因为既有属于后有的,也有不属于后有的,而这里指的是属于后有的那一种,所以说“后有本身就是再生,是后有之再生”。巴利
Apica gabbhassa seyyā gabbhaseyyā, punabbhavo eva abhinibbatti punabbhavābhinibbattīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā ca viññāṇaṭṭhitīti vuttepi na viññāṇato aññā ṭhiti atthi, evamidhāpi na gabbhato aññā seyyāti veditabbā. Abhinibbatti ca nāma yasmā punabbhavabhūtāpi apunabbhavabhūtāpi atthi, idha ca punabbhavabhūtā adhippetā. Tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘punabbhavo eva abhinibbatti punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti.
11 婆罗门从来到之后,就用“没有味道的形色”等八种骂人的事由来辱骂世尊。世尊是法的主宰、法王、法的主人、如来,出于悲悯,用清凉的眼光看着他。世尊已经透彻通达法界,因此获得了说法上的善巧自在。由于对法界通达得很透彻,他就像秋天无云的天空中升起的满月,又像秋天的太阳,驱散婆罗门心中的黑暗,用种种方式把那些骂人的事由显示成另外的样子。同时,他又要显示自己悲心的广大流布——这种悲心是因为不被八种世间法动摇而证得的,其特点是像大地一样平等的心和不动摇的法性。世尊这样想:“这位婆罗门只凭白发、秃头、缺牙、皱纹这些,就知道自己老了,却不知道自身被生跟着、被老追着、被病压着、被死打击,已经成了轮回的桩子,今天死了,明天又变成仰面躺着的婴儿。不过,他花了这么大的力气来到我这里,愿他这次来能有利益。”于是,为了显示自己在这个世间无与伦比的先出生身份,世尊就用“婆罗门,譬如……”这样的方式,为婆罗门把说法展开下去。巴利
11. Evaṃ āgatakālato paṭṭhāya arasarūpatādīhi aṭṭhahi akkosavatthūhi akkosantampi brāhmaṇaṃ bhagavā dhammissaro dhammarājā dhammassāmī tathāgato anukampāya sītaleneva cakkhunā olokento yaṃ dhammadhātuṃ paṭivijjhitvā desanāvilāsappatto hoti, tassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā vigatavalāhake antalikkhe samabbhuggato puṇṇacando viya saradakāle sūriyo viya ca brāhmaṇassa hadayandhakāraṃ vidhamanto tāniyeva akkosavatthūni tena tena pariyāyena aññathā dassetvā, punapi attano karuṇāvipphāraṃ aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi akampiyabhāvena paṭiladdhaṃ, tādiguṇalakkhaṇaṃ pathavīsamacittataṃ akuppadhammatañca pakāsento ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo kevalaṃ palitasirakhaṇḍadantavalittacatādīhi attano vuḍḍhabhāvaṃ sañjānāti, no ca kho jānāti attānaṃ jātiyā anugataṃ jarāya anusaṭaṃ byādhinā abhibhūtaṃ maraṇena abbhāhataṃ vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtaṃ ajja maritvā puna sveva uttānasayanadārakabhāvagamanīyaṃ. Mahantena kho pana ussāhena mama santikaṃ āgato, tadassa āgamanaṃ sātthakaṃ hotū’’ti cintetvā imasmiṃ loke attano appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvaṃ dassento seyyathāpi brāhmaṇātiādinā nayena brāhmaṇassa dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhesi.
这里,“譬如”是一个表示譬喻的不变词;“pi”是表示推测/设想/赞叹的意思;两者合起来就表明“正如那些婆罗门一样”。至于“母鸡的蛋,或八个、或十个、或十二个”,这里应当知道:虽然母鸡所生的蛋也可能比上面说的数目少一些或多一些,但只是为了语言表达顺畅,才这样说。因为世间的话就是这样说得顺溜。“tānassu”就是“tāni assu”,意思是“那些蛋应当存在”。所谓“被母鸡好好地孵卧”,是指那只生养它们的母鸡张开翅膀,伏在它们上面好好地孵卧。所谓“被好好地温热”,是指它按时令反复加温,从四周好好地熏热,也就是使它们带上暖气的意思。所谓“被好好地培育”,是指按时令从四周好好地孕育,也就是使它们沾上母鸡的气味。巴利
Tattha seyyathāti opammatthe nipāto; pīti sambhāvanatthe; ubhayenāpi yathā nāma brāhmaṇāti dasseti. Kukkuṭiyā aṇḍāni aṭṭha vā dasa vā dvādasa vāti ettha pana kiñcāpi kukkuṭiyā vuttappakārato ūnādhikānipi aṇḍāni honti, atha kho vacanasiliṭṭhatāya evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti. Tānassūti tāni assu, bhaveyyunti vuttaṃ hoti. Kukkuṭiyā sammā adhisayitānīti tāya janettiyā kukkuṭiyā pakkhe pasāretvā tesaṃ upari sayantiyā sammā adhisayitāni. Sammā pariseditānīti kālena kālaṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā suṭṭhu samantato seditāni, usmīkatānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti kālena kālaṃ suṭṭhu samantato bhāvitāni, kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,因为那些蛋被那只母鸡以这三种方式这样守护着,所以不会变坏。它们当中哪怕还有一点湿润,也会逐渐消失。蛋壳变薄了,脚爪尖和嘴尖也变硬了,小鸡逐渐成熟;因为蛋壳变薄,外面的光就能在里面显现。于是那些小鸡心想:“我们一直缩着手脚,待在这么狭窄的地方,现在外面能看到光了,我们在这里就能住得舒服了。”它们渴望出来,就用脚踢蛋壳,把脖子伸出去。于是蛋壳裂成两半,小鸡们拍着翅膀,发出与那一刻相应的叫声,就出来了。在这样出来的小鸡中,哪一只最先出来,就被称为“年长者”。因此,世尊想用这个譬喻来说明自己是最年长的,就问那位婆罗门:“那些小鸡当中……应该怎么称呼他呢?”其中,“小鸡”就是雏鸡。“应该怎么称呼他呢”,就是应该怎么称呼他,该称他是年长者还是年幼者。其余部分意思浅显易懂。巴利
Idāni yasmā tāya kukkuṭiyā evaṃ tīhi pakārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānāni na pūtīni honti. Yopi nesaṃ allasineho so pariyādānaṃ gacchati. Kapālaṃ tanukaṃ hoti, pādanakhasikhā ca mukhatuṇḍakañca kharaṃ hoti, kukkuṭapotakā paripākaṃ gacchanti, kapālassa tanukattā bahiddhā āloko anto paññāyati. Atha te kukkuṭapotakā ‘‘ciraṃ vata mayaṃ saṅkuṭitahatthapādā sambādhe sayimha, ayañca bahi āloko dissati, ettha dāni no sukhavihāro bhavissatī’’ti nikkhamitukāmā hutvā kapālaṃ pādena paharanti, gīvaṃ pasārenti. Tato taṃ kapālaṃ dvedhā bhijjati, kukkuṭapotakā pakkhe vidhunantā taṅkhaṇānurūpaṃ viravantā nikkhamanti. Evaṃ nikkhamantānañca nesaṃ yo paṭhamataraṃ nikkhamati so ‘jeṭṭho’ti vuccati. Tasmā bhagavā tāya upamāya attano jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ sādhetukāmo brāhmaṇaṃ pucchi – ‘‘yo nu kho tesaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ…pe… kinti svassa vacanīyo’’ti. Tattha kukkuṭacchāpakānanti kukkuṭapotakānaṃ. Kinti svassa vacanīyoti so kinti vacanīyo assa, kinti vattabbo bhaveyya jeṭṭho vā kaniṭṭho vāti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
于是婆罗门说:“乔达摩尊者,应该称他为最年长者。”乔达摩尊者,应该称他为最年长者。为什么呢?因为他在这群鸡里最年长,所以他是它们中最年长的,这就是意思。接着世尊为了说明这个譬喻,说道:“婆罗门,我也是如此……”等等。就像那只小鸡被算作最年长者;同样,我也是在无明所生的众生里。所谓“无明所生”,无明就是无知,就是进入了那里面。“众生”是有情的同义词。所以这里应当理解为:在无明的卵壳里面所容纳的众生当中。“成了卵一般”是指在卵中生成、出生、产生。正如有些在卵中出生的众生被称为“成了卵一般”;同样,这一切众生因为在无明的卵壳中出生,所以也被称为“成了卵一般”。“被包裹”是指被那无明的卵壳从四周覆盖、束缚、缠绕。“打破无明卵壳”是指打破那由无明构成的卵壳。“于世间独一”是指在一切世间住处中,唯我一人,没有第二个。“证得无上正等觉”中,“无上”是指没有更上的、最殊胜的。“正等觉”是指正确地、由自己觉悟;或者是指殊胜而美好的觉悟。“觉”可以指树、道、一切知智或涅槃。因为在“在菩提树下最初成正觉”以及“在伽耶与菩提之间”等文句里,“觉”指的是树。在“觉即是四道中的智慧”这处文句里,“觉”指的是道。“具大智慧者证得觉”这处文句里,指的是全知智。“到达觉,不死,无为”这处文句里,指的是涅槃。但这里指的是世尊的阿拉汉道智。也有人说是全知智。别人的阿拉汉道,是不是无上觉呢?不是。为什么?因为它不能给予一切功德。他们的阿拉汉道,对某些人只给阿拉汉果,对某些人给三明,对某些人给六神通,对某些人给四无碍解,对某些人给声闻巴拉密智。对独觉佛也只给独觉菩提智。而诸佛的(道智)则给一切功德圆满,就像国王的灌顶礼给予他成为一切世间主宰的身份。所以别人的任何(道智)都不是无上觉。“证得”是指我证知、通达;也就是说,我已到达、已获得。巴利
Tato brāhmaṇo āha – ‘‘jeṭṭhotissa bho gotama vacanīyo’’ti. Bho, gotama, so jeṭṭho iti assa vacanīyo. Kasmāti ce? So hi nesaṃ jeṭṭho, tasmā so nesaṃ vuḍḍhataroti attho. Athassa bhagavā opammaṃ sampaṭipādento āha – ‘‘evameva kho ahaṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādi. Yathā so kukkuṭacchāpako jeṭṭhoti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati; evaṃ ahampi avijjāgatāya pajāya. Avijjāgatāyāti avijjā vuccati aññāṇaṃ, tattha gatāya. Pajāyāti sattādhivacanametaṃ. Tasmā ettha avijjaṇḍakosassa anto paviṭṭhesu sattesūti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Aṇḍabhūtāyāti aṇḍe bhūtāya jātāya sañjātāya. Yathā hi aṇḍe nibbattā ekacce sattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccanti; evamayaṃ sabbāpi pajā avijjaṇḍakose nibbattattā aṇḍabhūtāti vuccati. Pariyonaddhāyāti tena avijjaṇḍakosena samantato onaddhāya baddhāya veṭhitāya . Avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvāti taṃ avijjāmayaṃ aṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā . Ekova loketi sakalepi lokasannivāse ahameva eko adutiyo. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Sammāsambodhinti sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ; atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ; bodhīti rukkhopi maggopi sabbaññutaññāṇampi nibbānampi vuccati. ‘‘Bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) ca ‘‘antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhi’’nti (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285) ca āgataṭṭhānesu hi rukkho bodhīti vuccati. ‘‘Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) āgataṭṭhāne maggo. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) āgataṭṭhāne sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. ‘‘Patvāna bodhiṃ amataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti āgataṭṭhāne nibbānaṃ. Idha pana bhagavato arahattamaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇantipi vadanti. Aññesaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti. Buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti, abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti. Abhisambuddhoti abbhaññāsiṃ paṭivijjhiṃ; pattomhi adhigatomhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,世尊以“婆罗门,我正是如此”等方式所说的譬喻阐明,应当结合它的含义来理解。就像那只母鸡对自己的蛋做出卧孵等三种动作;同样,坐在菩提座上的菩萨世尊,在自己的心相续中修习无常、苦、无我三种随观。就像母鸡完成三种动作使蛋不腐坏,菩萨世尊完成三种随观使观智不退失。就像母鸡通过三种动作使蛋的湿润油脂耗尽,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观使贯穿三有的贪爱油脂耗尽。就像母鸡通过三种动作使蛋壳变薄,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观使无明蛋壳变薄。就像母鸡通过三种动作使小鸡的脚爪尖和嘴喙变得坚硬锐利,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观使观智变得锐利、坚硬、明净、勇健。就像母鸡通过三种动作使小鸡成熟,菩萨世尊通过完成三种随观,应当知道这是观智成熟的时候、增长的时候、入胎的时候。巴利
Idāni yadetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘evameva kho ahaṃ brāhmaṇā’’ti ādinā nayena vuttaṃ opammasampaṭipādanaṃ, taṃ evamatthena saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi tassā kukkuṭiyā attano aṇḍesu adhisayanāditividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ; evaṃ bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato attano cittasantāne aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tividhānupassanākaraṇaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyāsampādanena aṇḍānaṃ apūtibhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa aparihāni. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍānaṃ allasinehapariyādānaṃ viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena bhavattayānugatanikantisinehapariyādānaṃ. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena aṇḍakapālānaṃ tanubhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa pādanakhasikhātuṇḍakānaṃ thaddhakharabhāvo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvo. Kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa paripākakālo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇassa paripākakālo vaḍḍhitakālo gabbhaggahaṇakālo veditabbo.
从此应当了知:正如母鸡以三种动作——用脚爪尖或嘴喙啄破卵壳、拍打翅膀——而平安破壳而出的那一刻;同样,作为菩萨的世尊以完成三种随观,令观智受胎,再以次第证得的阿拉汉道啄破无明卵壳,拍打神通之翼,平安现证一切佛功德——那一刻也正是应当了知之时。巴利
Tato kukkuṭiyā tividhakiriyākaraṇena kukkuṭacchāpakassa pādanakhasikhāya vā mukhatuṇḍakena vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā pakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā abhinibbhidākālo viya bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanāsampādanena vipassanāñāṇaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā anupubbādhigatena arahattamaggena avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhiññāpakkhe papphoṭetvā sotthinā sakalabuddhaguṇasacchikatakālo veditabboti.
婆罗门,我就是世间最年长、最殊胜的人。婆罗门,就像那些小鸡里,最先啄破蛋壳钻出来的那只小鸡,就是最年长的;同样,在陷于无明的众生当中,我最早打破那无明的蛋壳,最先以圣洁的出生而诞生,所以被称为最年长、更年长。而因为具足一切功德、无人能比,所以是最殊胜的。巴利
Svāhaṃ brāhmaṇa jeṭṭho seṭṭho lokassāti so ahaṃ brāhmaṇa yathā tesaṃ kukkuṭapotakānaṃ paṭhamataraṃ aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā abhinibbhido kukkuṭapotako jeṭṭho hoti; evaṃ avijjāgatāya pajāya taṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamataraṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātattā jeṭṭho vuḍḍhataroti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Sabbaguṇehi pana appaṭisamattā seṭṭhoti.
世尊这样向婆罗门说明了自己无与伦比的最胜地位之后,现在为了从前行阶段开始,说明自己是依靠怎样的修行道路证得它的,便说了“婆罗门,我的精进确实已经发动……”等话。或者,婆罗门听了世尊这无与伦比的最胜地位之后,心里生起了这样的念头:“他到底是靠什么修行道路达到这个地步的?”世尊知道他的心思,为了说明“我就是靠这条修行道路证得这无与伦比的最胜地位的”,便这样说了。其中,“婆罗门,我的精进确实已经发动”的意思是:婆罗门,我并不是以懈怠、失念、身体躁动、心散乱的状态证得这无与伦比的最胜地位的;相反,为了证得它,我的精进确实已经发动。也就是说,坐在菩提树下时,我发动了具备四支的精进,已被策励、持续不断地生起,没有松懈。而且正因为已经发动,我的精进才不退缩。不只是精进,我的念也因为面向所缘而现前了。正因为现前,所以没有忘失。身体轻安而不躁动:由于身心轻安,我的身体也轻安了。其中,因为名身轻安时,色身也必然轻安,所以不区分名身和色身,就统称为“身体轻安”。“不躁动”是说,它正因为轻安才不躁动,也就是远离了不安。心已得定、专一:我的心也被正确地安置、妥善安住,就像被安放进去一样;正因为得定,所以专一、不动、没有摇动。到这里为止,讲的是禅那的前分修行道路。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā attano anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ brāhmaṇassa pakāsetvā idāni yāya paṭipadāya taṃ adhigato taṃ paṭipadaṃ pubbabhāgato pabhuti dassetuṃ ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇā’’tiādimāha. Imaṃ vā bhagavato anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ sutvā brāhmaṇassa cittamevamuppannaṃ – ‘‘kāya nu kho paṭipadāya imaṃ patto’’ti. Tassa cittamaññāya ‘‘imāyāhaṃ paṭipadāya imaṃ anuttaraṃ jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ patto’’ti dassento evamāha. Tattha āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇa vīriyaṃ ahosīti brāhmaṇa, na mayā ayaṃ anuttaro jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvo kusītena muṭṭhassatinā sāraddhakāyena vikkhittacittena adhigato, apica kho tadadhigamāya āraddhaṃ kho pana me vīriyaṃ ahosi, bodhimaṇḍe nisinnena mayā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ ahosi, paggahitaṃ asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Āraddhattāyeva ca me taṃ asallīnaṃ ahosi. Na kevalañca vīriyameva, satipi me ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvena upaṭṭhitā ahosi. Upaṭṭhitattāyeva ca asammuṭṭhā. Passaddho kāyo asāraddhoti kāyacittapassaddhivasena kāyopi me passaddho ahosi . Tattha yasmā nāmakāye passaddhe rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hoti, tasmā nāmakāyo rūpakāyoti avisesetvāva passaddho kāyoti vuttaṃ. Asāraddhoti so ca kho passaddhattāyeva asāraddho, vigatadarathoti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhitaṃ cittaṃ ekagganti cittampi me sammā āhitaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ appitaṃ viya ahosi; samāhitattā eva ca ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandananti. Ettāvatā jhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadā kathitā hoti.
初禅的讨论巴利
Paṭhamajjhānakathā
现在,为了说明通过这条修行道路所证得的殊胜成果——从初禅开始,一直到三明为终点——世尊说了“那个我确实……”这样的话。其中,“已远离诸欲,已远离不善法”等语,虽然在《分别论》中已经按这样的方式解释了含义:“那里,什么是欲?欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲;思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲——这些就叫作欲。那里,什么是不善法?欲贪……乃至……疑——这些就叫作不善法。这样,从这些欲和这些不善法中已远离、已完全远离,因此说‘已远离诸欲,已远离不善法’。”但如果不借助注释书的方法,还是不能完全清楚明白,所以我们就按注释书的方法来说明它。巴利
Idāni imāya paṭipadāya adhigataṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ ādiṃ katvā vijjattayapariyosānaṃ visesaṃ dassento ‘‘so kho aha’’nti ādimāha. Tattha vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehītiādīnaṃ kiñcāpi ‘‘tattha katame kāmā? Chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo; saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo – ime vuccanti kāmā. Tattha katame akusalā dhammā? Kāmacchando…pe… vicikicchā – ime vuccanti akusalā dhammā. Iti imehi ca kāmehi imehi ca akusalehi dhammehi vivitto hoti pavivitto, tena vuccati – ‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅgeyeva attho vutto. Tathāpi aṭṭhakathānayaṃ vinā na suṭṭhu pākaṭoti aṭṭhakathānayeneva naṃ pakāsayissāma.
也就是这样:从诸欲中远离,意思是已经从诸欲中分离出来、不在一起、退避开去。而这里这个“eva”(正是、确实)一词,应当知道它是表示决定的意思。既然它是决定的意思,那么在成就并安住于初禅的时候,即使那些欲并不存在,它也说明那些欲是这初禅的对立面,并且说明这初禅的证得正是靠舍弃诸欲。怎么说明呢?因为当说“正是远离诸欲”这样作出决定时,这一点就清楚了:诸欲是这禅那的对立面,那些欲存在时这禅那就不能生起,就像黑暗存在时灯光不能显现一样;而舍弃了那些欲,这禅那才能证得,就像舍弃了此岸才能到达彼岸一样。所以它是在作出决定。巴利
Seyyathidaṃ – vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apasakketvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā tasmiṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kariyamāne idaṃ paññāyati. Nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati, andhakāre sati padīpo viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti, orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrasseva, tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
这里可能会有人问:为什么这个“eva”(确实)只放在前一句,而不放在后一句?难道不远离不善法也能成就禅那并安住吗?但不能这样看。因为这是从出离的角度来说的,所以它只放在前一句。这个禅那超越了欲界,正好对治欲贪,所以它正是诸欲的出离。正如经中所说:“这就是诸欲的出离,也就是出离。”后一句中也应当像“诸比丘,就在这里才有第一沙门,这里才有第二沙门”那样,把“eva”带进来说。因为不可能不远离其他被称为盖的不善法,却成就禅那并安住。所以应当理解,在“确实已离诸欲,确实已离不善法”这两句中都有这个“eva”。在这两句中,虽然“离”这个共同的说法已经涵盖了彼分远离、身远离等一切远离,但这里应当只取三种:身远离、心远离、镇伏远离。而“诸欲”这个词,应当理解为既包括按照“哪些是事欲?可爱可意的色……”这种方式所说的事欲,也包括在同一处和《分别论》中按照“欲求就是欲……”这种方式所说的烦恼欲,这一切都包含在内。这样,“确实已离诸欲”的意思就可以理解为“连事欲也确实已经远离”,由此就说了身远离。巴利
Tattha siyā – ‘‘kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyā’’ti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tannissaraṇato hi pubbapadeeva esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, paṭhamo samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ . Tasmā ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi ‘‘viviccā’’ti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavivekādayo kāyavivekādayo ca sabbepi vivekā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tathāpi kāyaviveko, cittaviveko, vikkhambhanavivekoti tayo eva idha daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Kāmehī’’ti iminā pana padena ye ca niddese ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpiyā rūpā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1; vibha. 964) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca ‘‘chando kāmo’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“已离不善法”这句话的意思是:从烦恼欲远离,或者从一切不善法中远离,这个理解是成立的。由此说的是心远离。在这里,第一句说的是远离事欲,也就是阐明舍离欲乐;第二句说的是远离烦恼欲,也就是阐明摄取离欲之乐。这样一来,仅仅通过远离事欲和烦恼欲的说法,就已经阐明了:第一句舍断杂染的所依,第二句断除杂染;第一句舍弃贪欲的因,第二句舍弃愚痴的因;第一句阐明加行清净,第二句阐明意乐的长养。这就是针对“诸欲”一词在事欲这一方面所作的解释。巴利
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi dhammehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanatoyeva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ; paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa; paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo ‘‘kāmehī’’ti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.
在烦恼欲这一边,“欲”和“贪”等等多种分类,其实指的就是欲贪本身,也就是这里所说的“欲”。它虽然也属于不善法,但在《分别论》里,以“其中什么是欲贪?就是欲……”这样的方式,把它从与禅那相对立的角度单独提出来说明。或者因为它是烦恼欲,所以在第一个词里说;因为它属于不善法,所以在第二个词里说。又因为它有多种分类,所以不说“从欲”,而说“从诸欲”。另外,其他法虽然也有不善的性质,但在《分别论》里,以“其中什么是不善法?欲贪……”这样的方式,为了显示它们与上层的禅支相违、相对立,所以只说了诸盖。盖是禅支的相违者,而禅支正是它们的对治者、摧毁者。正如《藏释》所说:“定是欲贪的对治,喜是嗔恚的对治,寻是昏沉睡眠的对治,乐是掉举后悔的对治,伺是疑的对治。”巴利
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandoyeva kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno, ‘‘tattha katamo kāmachando kāmo’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge jhānapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto. Kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā kāmacchando’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 564) uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni, viddhaṃsakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
在这里,“已离诸欲”这句话,说的是以镇伏的方式远离欲贪。“已离不善法”这句话,说的是以镇伏的方式远离五种盖。如果按未取和已取来分别,那么第一句是欲贪的镇伏离,第二句是其余诸盖的镇伏离。同样地,在三不善根中,第一句说的是以五种欲乐为对象的贪的镇伏离,第二句说的是以嗔恚事等为对象的嗔和痴的镇伏离。或者在瀑流等法当中,第一句说的是欲瀑流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、悭贪身系、欲贪结的镇伏离,第二句说的是其余瀑流、轭、漏、取、系、结的镇伏离。第一句还说了渴爱以及和它相应之法的镇伏离,第二句说了无明以及和它相应之法的镇伏离。此外应当知道,第一句说的是八种与贪相应的心生起的镇伏离,第二句说的是其余四种不善心生起的镇伏离。以上就是对“已离诸欲,已离不善法”这句话含义的说明。巴利
Evamettha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. ‘‘Vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Aggahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmogha-kāmayoga-kāmāsava-kāmupādāna-abhijjhākāyagantha-kāmarāga-saṃyojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaogha-yogāsava-upādāna-gantha-saṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena ca taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti ettha atthappakāsanā.
到这里,已经显示了初禅的断除支;现在要显示相应支,所以说“有寻、有伺”等。其中,思量就是寻,意思是思索。这个寻的特相是让心投向所缘,作用是撞击、反复撞击。正如所说:“由此,瑜伽行者让所缘被寻撞击、被寻反复撞击。”它的现起是把心引向所缘。审察就是伺,意思是随行。这个伺的特相是细细摩触所缘,作用是让俱生法跟随所缘,现起是让心持续不断地系念。虽然这两者在某些地方并不分离,但按粗细来分:寻像撞钟时的初声,是心最初投向所缘,性质粗重;伺像余音的回响,是心持续系念,性质微细。在这里,寻是心的扩散、动荡状态,像想飞上天空的鸟振翅,也像心随香气的蜜蜂朝向莲花;伺是心的寂静运行、不过度动荡的状态,像已飞上天空的鸟展翅盘旋,也像已朝向莲花落下的蜜蜂在莲花上方回旋。它们之间的这种差别,在初禅和第二禅中才变得明显。于是,这个禅与这个寻、这个伺一同生起,就像树与花、果一同存在一样,所以被称为“有寻有伺”。不过在《分别论》中,则是以“以此寻及此伺而具备、等具备……”这样的方式,从人的角度来开示。那里的意思也应当同样理解。巴利
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassento savitakkaṃ savicārantiādimāha. Tattha vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo, āhananapariyāhananaraso. Tathā hi ‘‘tena yogāvacaro ārammaṇaṃ vitakkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotī’’ti vuccati. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo, tattha sahajātānuyojanaraso, cittassa anuppabandhanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paripphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhāvo cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge. So pana nesaṃ viseso paṭhama-dutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena ca phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena upeto hoti samupeto’’tiādinā (vibha. 565) nayena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā. Attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.
“离生”在这里,“离”就是远离,意思是诸盖的离去。或者,“离”指已远离的状态,意思是已离诸盖的、与禅那相应的一整团法。因此,从远离而生,或者在那远离中生起,就是“离生”。“喜乐”在这里,“喜”是让人喜悦,它的特相是喜爱,作用是让身心满足,或者说是遍满,表现为雀跃。“乐”是安乐,或者说它能好好吞噬、挖除身心的病痛,所以叫乐;它的特相是适意,作用是让相应法增长,表现为资助。虽然这两者在某些情况下不相分离,但获得可意所缘时的欢喜是喜,体验已得之味是乐。有喜的地方就有乐,有乐的地方则不一定有喜。喜归在行蕴里,乐归在受蕴里。喜就像疲惫的旅人看到或听到林中有水,乐就像进入林荫、喝到那水。应当知道,这是就当时明显的情况而说的。这个禅那有这喜和这乐,或者说这喜和这乐存在于这个禅那中,所以这个禅那被称为“喜乐”。巴利
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pinayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā kāyacittapīnanarasā , pharaṇarasā vā, odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ, sampayuttakānaṃ upabrūhanarasaṃ, anuggahapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Satipi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti tattha sukhaṃ, yattha sukhaṃ tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantodakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayañca pīti, idañca sukhaṃ, assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati.
或者,“喜”和“乐”合起来就是“喜乐”,就像“法”和“律”等复合词一样。这个禅那有从远离而生的喜乐,或者说,从远离而生的喜乐存在于这个禅那之中,所以也可以只用“离生喜乐”这一个词来表达。就像禅那本身是从远离而生的,这里的喜乐也同样是从远离而生的,而且它确实存在于这个禅那之中,因此用“离生喜乐”这一个词来说,也是合适的。不过在《分别论》中,则是用“这个乐与这个喜俱行”等等的方式来说明,但其中的含义在那里也应该这样理解。巴利
Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ, dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhamassa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhaṃ pettha vivekajameva hoti, tañcassa atthīti tasmā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagata’’ntiādinā (vibha. 567) nayenetaṃ vuttaṃ. Attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.
“第一”是因为按数目顺序排在最前,所以叫第一;又因为这是最先证得的,所以也叫第一。它能烧掉与禅定对立的心所,所以叫禅那;修行的人依靠它来修禅,所以也叫禅那,意思就是烧尽与禅定对立的心所,或者思虑自己的所缘。或者说,它自己去思虑、注视着所缘,所以叫禅那,因此被称为“审察相”。这个禅那有两种:所缘审察和特相审察。其中,所缘审察是指连同近行定在内的八种等至。为什么?因为它是审察遍处等所缘的。特相审察是指观、道、果。为什么?因为它是审察特相的。这里,观是审察无常等特相的;而观的审察作用是由道来完成的,所以道被称为特相审察。果则是审察灭的真实相状的,所以被称为特相审察。不过,在这个地方,只有所缘审察才是这里所说的禅那的意思。巴利
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatītipi paṭhamaṃ. Paccanīkadhamme jhāpetīti jhānaṃ, iminā yogino jhāyantītipi jhānaṃ, paccanīkadhamme ḍahanti gocaraṃ vā cintentīti attho. Sayaṃ vā taṃ jhāyati upanijjhāyatīti jhānaṃ, teneva upanijjhāyanalakkhaṇanti vuccati. Tadetaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ , lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha ārammaṇūpanijjhānanti saha upacārena aṭṭha samāpattiyo vuccanti. Kasmā? Kasiṇādiārammaṇūpanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vipassanāmaggaphalāni vuccanti. Kasmā? Lakkhaṇūpanijjhāyanato. Ettha hi vipassanā aniccalakkhaṇādīni upanijjhāyati, vipassanāya upanijjhāyanakiccaṃ pana maggena sijjhatīti maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vuccati. Phalaṃ pana nirodhassa tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti vuccati. Imasmiṃ panatthe ārammaṇūpanijjhānameva jhānanti adhippetaṃ.
这里有人问:“那么,到底什么样的禅那才配得上用‘有寻有伺……喜乐’这样的说法来称呼呢?”回答:就像在“有财有眷属”这类说法里,除了财富和眷属之外,并没有另一个东西配得上“有”这个称呼;同样,除了寻等这些法之外,也没有另一个东西配得上这个称呼。又像说“有车有步兵的军队”时,“军队”这个名称其实就是指军中的各部分;在这里也应当知道,“禅那”这个名称就是指五个支分。是哪五个?寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性。因为这些正是以“有寻有伺”等方式被说为支分的。如果说“心一境性没有被提到,所以它不算一支”,这也不对。为什么不对?因为它其实已经被说到了。在《分别论》里就说:“禅那即是寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性。”所以,正如此处说了“有寻有伺”,虽然没有直接说“有心一境性”,但根据《分别论》的这句话,就应当知道心一境性也是禅那的一支。世尊在这里作略说时所依据的意图,在《分别论》中也同样被阐明了。巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘katamaṃ pana taṃ jhānaṃ nāma, yaṃ savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ…pe… pītisukhanti evaṃ apadesaṃ arahatī’’ti? Vuccate – yathā sadhano saparijanotiādīsu ṭhapetvā dhanañca parijanañca añño apadesāraho hoti, evaṃ ṭhapetvā vitakkādidhamme aññaṃ apadesārahaṃ natthi. Yathā pana sarathā sapatti senāti vutte senaṅgesuyeva senāsammuti, evamidha pañcasu aṅgesuyeva jhānasammuti veditabbā. Katamesu pañcasu? Vitakko, vicāro, pīti, sukhaṃ, cittekaggatāti etesu. Etāneva hissa ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā nayena aṅgabhāvena vuttāni. Avuttattā ekaggatā aṅgaṃ na hotīti ce tañca na. Kasmā? Vuttattā eva. Sāpi hi vibhaṅge ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti evaṃ vuttāyeva. Tasmā yathā savitakkaṃ savicāranti, evaṃ sacittekaggatanti idha avuttepi iminā vibhaṅgavacanena cittekaggatāpi aṅgamevāti veditabbā. Yena hi adhippāyena bhagavatā uddeso kato, so eva tena vibhaṅgepi pakāsitoti.
“具足”是指进入、达到。也可以说,是指使具足、使完成。不过在《分别论》中说:“‘具足’就是初禅的得到、获得、到达、成就、接触、等触、证悟、具足。”这里的意思也应当这样理解。“住”是指:在菩提树下,以称为坐的威仪方式安住,成为具有前面所说的那种禅那的人,使自身的姿态、行为、守护、存续、维持、游行、居住得以完成。这就是它的意思。因为《分别论》中这样说:“‘住’就是行动、进行、守护、存续、维持、游行、居住,因此称为‘住’。”巴利
Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘upasampajjāti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābho paṭilābho patti sampatti phusanā samphusanā sacchikiriyā upasampadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāpi evamevattho veditabbo. Vihāsinti bodhimaṇḍe nisajjasaṅkhātena iriyāpathavihārena itivuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa iriyaṃ vuttiṃ pālanaṃ yapanaṃ yāpanaṃ cāraṃ vihāraṃ abhinipphādesinti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge – ‘‘viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati, tena vuccati viharatī’’ti (vibha. 512).
那么,世尊是做了什么之后,才成就并安住于这个禅那的呢?是修习了业处。是哪一个业处呢?是入出息念业处。如果其他人也有这个需求,应该怎么做呢?其他人也应该修习这个业处,或者修习地遍等当中的某一种。这些业处的修习方法,应该按照《清净道论》里所说的那样来理解。但在这里如果详细说明,律藏的因缘部分就会变得太过庞大,所以我们只做圣典义理的阐明而已。巴利
Kiṃ pana katvā bhagavā imaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsīti? Kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā. Kataraṃ? Ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ. Aññena tadatthikena kiṃ kātabbanti? Aññenapi etaṃ vā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ bhāvetabbaṃ. Tesaṃ bhāvanānayo visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.55) vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idha pana vuccamāne atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ hoti, tasmā pāḷiyā atthappakāsanamattameva karomāti.
第二禅那的讨论巴利
Dutiyajjhānakathā
寻伺的止息,是指寻和伺这两者的止息、超越;也就是说,在第二禅那生起的那一刻,它们不再出现。在这里,虽然第二禅那中初禅的所有法都不存在——初禅里有触等法,而这里则是另外一些法——但应当知道,之所以说“寻伺的止息”,是为了说明:通过超越粗重的禅支,才能从初禅证得第二禅等更高的禅那。“内”在这里指的是自身内在。而在《分别论》中只说到“内,即个人的”。因为这里指的是自身内在,所以此处的意思是:生于自己、在自己的相续中生起。巴利
Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā; dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idha; oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dīpanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattamadhippetaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘ajjhattaṃ paccatta’’nti (vibha. 573) ettakameva vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ attano santāne nibbattanti ayamettha attho.
“净信”:净信指的就是信。由于与净信相应,禅那本身也叫净信,就像因为与蓝色相应,布就被叫做蓝布一样。或者说,因为那禅那具足了净信,通过止息寻与伺的搅动而使心变得清净澄澈,所以也称它为净信。在这个释义方案里,应当理解“净信”是和“心的”这样搭配的。而在前一个释义方案里,“心的”要和“一境”搭配。那里的意思是:单独生起的就是“一境”,也就是说,因为不被寻和伺所覆盖,它以最上、最殊胜的方式生起。这里的“令生起”,是指令相应法生起,也就是使它们生起的意思。世间也确实把最殊胜者称为“一”。或者,由于远离寻与伺,也可以说“一”即无伴。再者,令相应法生起者为“udi”,即令它们生起之义。以最胜之义为“一”,而它又是“udi”,所以是“ekodi”,这是定的同义词。如此,他修习、增长此“一境”,这就是第二禅的一境性。然而,此一境性因为是心的,不是有情的,不是命者的,所以说它为“心的一境性”。巴利
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ, nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo. Purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahato vā eko asahāyo hutvātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhāpetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi, samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhayatīti idaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa na jīvassa, tasmā etaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvanti vuttaṃ.
难道这信在第一禅里就没有吗?而那个定也叫“一心”。那为什么只对这里说“心的清净”和“心的一境性”呢?回答说:因为第一禅被寻和伺的搅动所激荡,就像被波浪和涟漪搅乱的水一样,并不很清净,所以即使有信,也不说它是“清净”。也正因为不清净,这里的定也不够明显,所以也不说它是“心的一境性”。但在第二禅里,由于寻和伺的障碍没有了,信得到了空间而变得强有力;又因为得到了强信作为助伴,定也变得明显。所以应当知道,只有在这里才这样说。不过在《分别论》里只说:“清净,就是信、相信、信赖、净信;心的一境性,就是心的安住……正定。”应当知道,这样说的义理解释与前面并不矛盾,反而完全一致、完全契合。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi; atha kasmā idameva sampasādanaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāvañcā’’ti vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya sampasādananti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo, tasmā ekodibhāvantipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyappaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo; tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana ‘‘sampasādananti yā saddhā saddahanā okappanā abhippasādo, cetaso ekodibhāvanti yā cittassa ṭhiti…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttena panetena saddhiṃ ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yathā na virujjhati aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti ca evaṃ veditabbā.
无寻、无伺:因为通过修习已经断除了,所以在这个禅里没有寻,或者这个禅本身没有寻,因此叫无寻。用同样的方式理解无伺。《分别论》(vibha. 576)里也说:“这样,这个寻和这个伺已经寂静、已经平息、已经安息、已经消失、已经灭去、已经消融、已经消散、已经干涸、已经枯竭、已经终止,因此称为无寻、无伺。”巴利
Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Vibhaṅgepi (vibha. 576) vuttaṃ ‘‘iti ayañca vitakko ayañca vicāro santā honti samitā vūpasantā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantīkatā, tena vuccati avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti.
这里有人问:寻与伺的止息这句话,不是已经把这个道理说明清楚了吗?那为什么还要再说无寻、无伺呢?回答说:确实,这个道理已经成立了,但那句话并不是在阐明这个道理。我们不是说过吗:为了说明通过超越初禅中较粗重的禅支,而能证得第二禅等更高的禅那,所以才说寻与伺的止息。巴利
Etthāha – nanu ca ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti imināpi ayamattho siddho, atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti? Vuccate – evametaṃ siddho vāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ; nanu avocumha – ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dīpanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
另外,寻与伺的寂止使此(第二禅)具有清净,而非因烦恼浑浊而清净。又,寻与伺的寂止所带来之心一境性,不像近行禅那样由舍弃诸盖而得,也不像初禅那样由禅支显现而得。因此,这句话是在说明清净与心一境性二者的原因。同样,寻与伺的寂止使此(第二禅)成为无寻无伺,不像第三禅、第四禅那样因寻伺本不存在,也不像眼识等那样因本来即无。因此,这句话也是在说明无寻无伺状态的原因,而不只是说明寻伺不存在。至于“无寻、无伺”这句话,才仅仅是说明寻伺的不存在。所以,前面虽已说过,后面仍须再说一次。巴利
Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālusiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca, na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ. Vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ, tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
“定所生”:意思是从初禅的定,或者从与初禅相应的定所生。在这里,虽然初禅也是从相应的定所生,但只有这第二禅,因为远离了寻和伺的扰动,极其稳固、非常清净,才真正配得上称为“定”。所以,为了赞叹这第二禅的功德,才说它是“定所生”。“喜、乐”:和前面所说的一样。巴利
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva.
“第二”是指按数目顺序排第二;又因为这是进入的第二个禅定,所以也叫第二。“禅那”在这里应当知道:就像初禅以寻等构成五支那样,这第二禅以清净等构成“四支”。正如经中所说:“禅那就是清净、喜、乐、心一境性。”这只是方便说法。如果除去清净,按究竟义来说,这禅其实只有三支。正如经中所说:“那时什么是三支禅那?喜、乐、心一境性。”其余内容如前所说。巴利
Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbato dutiyaṃ, idaṃ dutiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi dutiyaṃ. Jhānanti ettha pana yathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ hoti, evamidaṃ sampasādādīhi ‘‘caturaṅgika’’nti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti sampasādo, pīti, sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 580). Pariyāyoyeva ceso. Sampasādanaṃ pana ṭhapetvā nippariyāyena tivaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye tivaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti? Pīti, sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 161). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第三禅那的讨论巴利
Tatiyajjhānakathā
“由喜的离染”这一句里,所说的“喜”就是前面已经解释过的那个喜。“离染”是指对那喜的厌离,或者超越它。两者之间的“ca”这个词是集合连接的作用,它既可以集合“寂止”,也可以集合“寻伺的寂止”。当它集合的只是“寂止”时,就应该这样理解句子的搭配:“由喜的离染,以及更进一步,由寂止。”在这种搭配里,“离染”是厌离的意思。因此应当看出,它的含义是:“由对喜的厌离,以及由寂止。”当它集合的是“寻伺的寂止”时,就应该这样理解搭配:“由喜的离染,以及更进一步,由寻与伺的寂止。”在这种搭配里,“离染”是超越的意思。因此应当看出,它的含义是:“由喜的超越,以及由寻与伺的寂止。”巴利
Pītiyāca virāgāti ettha vuttatthāyeva pīti. Virāgoti tassā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā. Ubhinnamantarā ‘‘ca’’ saddo sampiṇḍanattho, so hi vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāyaṃ virāgo jigucchanattho hoti. Tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca vūpasamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāyaṃ virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti. Tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
这些寻与伺虽然在第二禅里就已经止息了,但这里之所以这样说,是为了指明此禅的道途,同时也是为了赞叹它。因为一旦说到“寻与伺的止息”,人们就会明白:“寻与伺的止息,正是此禅的道途。”就像在第三圣道那里,对于那些并非在第三道中被断除的身见等烦恼,经文说“断除五种下分结”,这种说法本身就是一种赞叹,能让那些为了证得它而精进的人生起策励;同样地,这里对于并非在此第三禅中止息的寻与伺,说它们“止息”,也是一种赞叹。因此,这个意思就被表述为:“由喜的超越,以及寻与伺的止息。”巴利
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati – ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.132) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti tadadhigamāya ussukānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ; evamevaṃ idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto – ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
“他住于舍”:这里的“舍”(upekkhā)来自“观照”(upapattito ikkhati)——即平等地看待,也就是不偏袒任何一方地看待。因为具足了那清净、广大、稳固的舍,第三禅的具足者被称为“住于舍者”。舍有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍性舍、禅舍、遍净舍。这十种舍,应当依照各处经文所述,从地、人、心、所缘,以及依《法集论注·殊胜义论》中蕴摄、同一刹那、善三法摄要的方式来了知。这里之所以没有广说,是因为会使律藏的因缘部分变得过于繁重。不过,就特相等而言,这里所指的舍,以中舍为特相,以不关切为作用,以无作为为现起,以离喜为足处。巴利
Upekkhako ca vihāsinti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ passati, apakkhapatitāva hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati. Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti – chaḷaṅgupekkhā, brahmavihārupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhā, vīriyupekkhā, saṅkhārupekkhā, vedanupekkhā, vipassanupekkhā, tatramajjhattupekkhā, jhānupekkhā, pārisuddhupekkhāti. Evamayaṃ dasavidhāpi tattha tattha āgatanayato bhūmipuggalacittārammaṇato, khandhasaṅgaha-ekakkhaṇakusalattikasaṅkhepavasena ca aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Idha pana vuccamānā vinayanidānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ karotīti na vuttā. Lakkhaṇādito pana idha adhippetupekkhā majjhattalakkhaṇā, anābhogarasā, abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānā, pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāti.
这里有人问:难道这个舍在意义上不就是中舍性舍吗?而它在初禅和第二禅里也存在,所以在那里也应该说“住于舍”,为什么没说呢?因为它的作用不明显。在那里,它的作用确实不明显,因为被寻等法压住了。但在这里,它没有被寻、伺、喜压住,就像抬起头来一样,作用变得明显了,所以才说出来。巴利
Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi, tasmā tatrāpi ‘‘upekkhako ca vihāsi’’nti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttāti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassā tattha kiccaṃ, vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā. Idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
对“住于舍者”这一句的完整义释,到此结束。巴利
Niṭṭhitā ‘‘upekkhako ca vihāsi’’nti etassa sabbaso atthavaṇṇanā.
现在解释“具念与正知”这一句。其中,能忆念就是“具念”,能完全了知就是“正知”。这是从人的角度来说念和正知。在这当中,念以忆念为特征,以不忘失为作用,以守护为显现;正知以不迷惑为特征,以审察为作用,以简择为显现。在这里,虽然这种念与正知在之前的诸禅那中也存在——因为失念、没有正知的人,连近行定都不能成就,更不用说安止定了——但由于那些禅那比较粗显,心在那里的运作就像人在平地上行走一样容易,念与正知的作用在那里并不明显。而由于舍离了粗显的禅支,这第三禅变得微细,心在这里的运作应当被理解为像人走在刀刃上一样,完全由念与正知的作用所摄持,所以只在这里特别说明。还有什么呢?就像跟随着母牛的牛犊,被从母牛身边带走后,如果不加看护,又会再回到母牛那里;同样,这第三禅的乐虽然已经从喜中脱离出来,但如果不以念与正知的守护来看护,就可能再次接近喜,变成与喜相应。或者,众生容易贪着于乐,而这里的乐极为甜美,因为从此以上再没有乐了。然而,在这里,依靠念与正知的力量,对乐才能不贪着,否则就不能。为了显示这一层特殊的义理,应当知道就是在这里才这样说。巴利
Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato, sampajānātīti sampajāno. Puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati, asammussanarasā, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā; asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ, tīraṇarasaṃ, pavicayapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacārajjhānamattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā; oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitāyeva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo? Yathāpi dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati; evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā rajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ, tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā . Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释“以身体感受乐”这一句。成就第三禅的人虽然没有对乐受的贪著,但即便如此,因为与名身相应的乐,由它所生的极细色遍满了色身,由于色身被这极细色所遍满,即使出定之后也能感受乐。为了说明这个道理,所以说“以身体感受乐”。巴利
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesinti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhappaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭo, yassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesi’’nti āha.
现在来说明“诸圣者所称说的住于舍、具念、住于乐者”这句话。在这里,因为该禅那、以该禅那为因,佛陀等诸圣者称说、宣示、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明、光显那位成就第三禅的人,其用意是赞叹。怎样称说呢?就是“住于舍、具念、住于乐者”。成就第三禅而住。应当知道这里应当这样连接理解。巴利
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgīpuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? ‘‘Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsinti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
他们为什么这样赞叹他呢?因为他值得赞叹。这位修行者在极其甜美、已经达到乐的顶点的第三禅中,仍然保持舍,不被对乐的贪著所牵引;同时喜不再生起,因而念现前,具足正念。又因为他以名身感受那圣者所喜爱、只有圣者才修习、没有杂染的乐,所以值得赞叹。应当知道,诸圣者正是因为他值得赞叹,为了显示这些作为赞叹原因的功德,才这样赞叹他:住于舍、具念、住于乐。巴利
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati, yathā ca pīti na uppajjati; evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsāhetubhūte guṇe pakāsentā ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ.
第三:按计数顺序来说是第三。这也是因为进入这第三禅,所以叫第三。禅:在这里,就像第二禅具有净信等四支,这第三禅具有舍等五支。正如经中所说:“禅就是舍、念、正知、乐、心一境性。”(《分别论》591)这只是方便的说法。如果除去舍、念、正知,按非方便的说法,这禅就只有两支。正如经中所说:“那时,什么是二支禅?乐和心一境性。”(《法集论》163)其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbato tatiyaṃ. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi tatiyaṃ. Jhānanti ettha ca yathā dutiyaṃ sampasādādīhi caturaṅgikaṃ; evamidaṃ upekkhādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti upekkhā sati sampajaññaṃ sukhaṃ cittassa ekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 591). Pariyāyoyeva ceso. Upekkhāsatisampajaññāni pana ṭhapetvā nippariyāyena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti ? Sukhaṃ, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 163). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第四禅那的讨论巴利
Catutthajjhānakathā
“由舍断乐与由舍断苦”,就是舍断身体的乐和身体的苦。“先前”是指在那之前,而不是在第四禅的刹那。“喜与忧的息灭”,就是心里的乐和心里的苦——这两者的息灭也是说在先前就已舍断。那么,它们什么时候被舍断呢?在四禅的近行刹那。因为喜是在第四禅的近行刹那才被舍断;苦、忧、乐则是在初禅、二禅、三禅的近行刹那被舍断。这样,虽然这里没有按照舍断的次第来说,但在《根分别》中,诸根是依照列举的次第而说,这里也一样,应当知道乐、苦、喜、忧的舍断就是依此理。巴利
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe . Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa ca cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ, indriyavibhaṅge pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassa domanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如果这些受只是在各个禅那的近行刹那才被断除,那为什么经典里又说:“已生起的苦根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘远离诸欲……成就初禅而住,已生起的苦根就在这里无余灭尽。已生起的忧根……乐根……喜根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘由于舍断乐……成就第四禅而住,已生起的喜根就在这里无余灭尽”(《相应部》5.510),像这样把灭尽说成就是在诸禅那之中呢?这是因为在诸禅那中有殊胜的灭尽。因为在初禅等之中,它们的灭尽是殊胜的灭尽,而不只是灭尽;但在近行刹那,只是灭尽,而不是殊胜的灭尽。就像这样,在转向不同所缘时,即使在初禅近行中已经灭尽的苦根,也可能因为蚊虻等接触,或者因为坐姿不适的压迫而再次生起,但在安止之内则绝不会生起。或者说,在近行中被灭尽的它,并没有彻底灭尽,因为还没有被它的对立面所摧毁。然而在安止之内,由于喜的遍满,全身都被乐所浸润。对于全身被乐所浸润的人,苦根就彻底灭尽,因为它已被对立面所摧毁。再者,在转向不同所缘时,即使在第二禅近行中已被舍断的忧根,由于它是在有寻有伺为缘、有身体疲劳和心受伤害时才会生起,在没有寻伺时就不会生起。而它生起的地方,就是有寻有伺的地方。而且在第二禅近行中,寻伺还没有被舍断,所以它在那里还可能生起,因为它的生起条件还没有被断除。但在第二禅中就不会了,因为它的生起条件已被断除。同样,在第三禅近行中,即使已被舍断的乐根,对于被喜所产生的殊胜色法所触及的身体,还可能生起,但在第三禅中就不会了。因为在第三禅中,作为乐之条件的喜已经彻底灭尽。同样,在第四禅近行中,即使已被舍断的喜根,由于它接近,又因为尚未达到安止的舍还不存在,所以还没有完全超越,还可能生起,但在第四禅中就不会了。也正是因为这个原因,经典中在各处都采用“在这里已生起的苦根无余灭尽”这种“无余”的说法。巴利
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassupacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ… sukhindriyaṃ… somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi nesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva; nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho. Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanupatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti; paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti. Sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ; paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjane eva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassa domanassindriyassa yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārappaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittupaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnā eva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti; appahīnapaccayattā. Na tveva dutiyajjhāne; pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭakāyassa siyā uppatti, na tveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhāti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, na tveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
这里有人问:这些受在每一种禅的近行阶段就已经被断除了,那为什么还要在这里把它们都拿出来说呢?是为了容易把握。因为这里说的“不苦不乐”受,非常微细,极难辨认,没办法容易地把握它。所以,就好比有一头凶恶的公牛,不管从哪个方向靠近都抓不住它,牧牛人为了抓住它,就把所有的牛都赶进一个牛栏里,然后一头一头地往外牵,按顺序轮到它的时候,就说“就是这头,抓住它”,这样就能让人把它抓住。同样地,世尊为了容易把握,就把所有这些受都集合在一起。这样把它们集合起来展示之后,就能让人认识到:“那个既不是乐、也不是苦,既不是喜悦、也不是忧愁的,就是不苦不乐受。”巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassūpacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāharī’’ti? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Yā hi ayaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukha’’nti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā atidubbiññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ. Tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā vā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa gahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbe gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so, gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpayati; evameva bhagavā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbā etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ na dukkhaṃ na somanassaṃ na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
另外也要知道,这些受之所以被说到,是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘。因为舍断乐等,确实就是它的缘。就像经里说的:“贤友,有四种缘,能成就进入不苦不乐心解脱。贤友,在这里,比丘因为舍断了乐……成就并安住于第四禅。贤友,这就是四种能成就进入不苦不乐心解脱的缘。”(《中部》1.458)又或者,就像在其他地方,身见等虽然早已被舍断,但为了称赞第三道,仍然在那里说它们被舍断;同样,这里也是为了称赞这个禅那,才说这些受被舍断,这也应当知道。又或者,应当知道,这里说这些是为了通过断除它们的缘,来显示贪和嗔在这里已经极其遥远。因为在这些受当中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。而由于乐等已被断除,那些有缘的贪和嗔也就被摧毁,因此变得极其遥远。巴利
Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Sukhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu, sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā; evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca te sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
不苦不乐:因为没有苦,所以不苦;因为没有乐,所以不乐。这里是用这个说法来指出与苦、乐相对立的第三种受,而不只是说没有苦也没有乐而已。所谓第三种受,就叫不苦不乐,也叫舍。应当知道,它以领受可爱与不可爱之外的中性境为特征,以中立为作用,以不显现为表现,以乐的止息为近因。舍念清净:就是由舍所产生的念的清净。在这个禅那中,念极其清净。而那个念的清净是由舍造成的,不是由别的什么造成的,所以称为舍念清净。《分别》中也这样说:这个念依靠这个舍而变得明净、清净、洁白,因此称为舍念清净。在这里使念清净的那个舍,从意义上应当知道就是中舍性。而且在这里不只是念清净,一切相应法也都是清净的;只是以念为首来作这个开示。巴利
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ, sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma – adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattarasā, avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānā, sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati. Yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā na aññena; tasmā etaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti vuccati. Vibhaṅgepi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ayaṃ sati imāya upekkhāya visadā hoti parisuddhā pariyodātā, tena vuccati – ‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’’nti (vibha. 597). Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatā veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā; satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在这里,虽然这种舍在下面的三种禅那里也存在,但就像白天的月亮,虽然白天有月亮,却因为被太阳的光辉压住,本身又很柔和,或者因为没有得到与之相应的夜晚作为助缘,所以也是不清净、不洁白的。同样,这种中舍性的月亮,在初禅等各个禅那中虽然也存在,但因为被寻、伺等敌对法的光焰压住,又没有得到与之相应的舍受之夜作为助缘,所以也是不清净的。当它不清净的时候,就像白天不清净的月亮一样,与它同时生起的念等法也都不清净。所以在那些禅那里,连一个也不能称为“舍念清净”。但在这里,因为没有寻等敌对法光焰的压制,又得到了与之相应的舍受之夜,这种中舍性的月亮就极其清净。因为它清净,就像清净月亮的光辉一样,与它同时生起的念等法也都清净洁白。因此应当知道,只有这第四禅才被称为“舍念清净”。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā; evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkavicārādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā alābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamādijjhānabhedesu aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti; tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā, tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā, tasmā idameva upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“第四”是指按数目顺序排到第四。因为进入这个第四禅,所以也叫第四。“禅”在这里的意思是:就像第三禅由舍等五支组成,这个第四禅由舍等三支组成。正如经中所说:“禅就是舍、念、心一境性。”这只是一种引申的说法。如果去掉念,只取舍和一境性,按严格的说法,这个禅就只有两支。正如经中所说:“那时什么是二支禅?舍和心一境性。”其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbato catutthaṃ. Idaṃ catutthaṃ samāpajjatītipi catutthaṃ. Jhānanti ettha yathā tatiyaṃ upekkhādīhi pañcaṅgikaṃ; evamidaṃ upekkhādīhi tivaṅgikaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jhānanti upekkhā, sati cittassekaggatā’’ti. Pariyāyo eva ceso. Ṭhapetvā pana satiṃ upekkhekaggatameva gahetvā nippariyāyena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti? Upekkhā, cittassekaggatā’’ti (dha. sa. 165). Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
关于宿命通的讨论巴利
Pubbenivāsakathā
12 这四种禅那,对某些人来说是为了达到心一境性,对某些人来说是为了作为观禅的基础,对某些人来说是为了作为神通的基础,对某些人来说是为了作为灭尽定的基础,对某些人来说则是为了投生到更高的存在界。其中,对漏尽者(阿罗汉)来说,是为了达到心一境性。因为他们进入禅那后,心想:“我们将以专一的心,安乐地度过这一天。”就这样修习遍相的前方便后,生起八种等至。对有学圣者和凡夫来说,如果他们生起禅那是为了“从等至出定后,以入定的心修观”,那么这些禅那就成为观禅的基础。如果有人生起八种等至后,进入作为神通基础的禅那,从等至出定后,希求如经中所说“一身变成多身”等神通而修习,那么这些禅那对他们来说就成为神通的基础。如果有人生起八种等至后,心想:“进入灭尽定,七天里没有心识,在今生就证得灭尽涅槃,安乐地安住。”因而修习,那么这些禅那对他们来说就成为灭尽定的基础。如果有人生起八种等至后,心想:“不退失禅那,投生到梵天界。”因而修习,那么这些禅那对他们来说就是为了投生到更高的存在界。巴利
12. Iti imāni cattāri jhānāni kesañci cittekaggatatthāni honti, kesañci vipassanāpādakāni, kesañci abhiññāpādakāni, kesañci nirodhapādakāni, kesañci bhavokkamanatthāni. Tattha khīṇāsavānaṃ cittekaggatatthāni honti, te hi samāpajjitvā ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti iccevaṃ kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattenti. Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ ‘‘samāpattito vuṭṭhāya samāhitena cittena vipassissāmā’’ti nibbattentānaṃ vipassanāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā abhiññāpādakaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’’ti vuttanayā abhiññāyo patthentā nibbattenti, tesaṃ abhiññāpādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ‘‘nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā diṭṭheva dhamme nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti nibbattenti, tesaṃ nirodhapādakāni honti. Ye pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ‘‘aparihīnajjhānā hutvā brahmaloke uppajjissāmā’’ti nibbattenti, tesaṃ bhavokkamanatthāni honti.
世尊在菩提树下所证得的这第四禅,对他来说既是观的基础,也是神通的基础,也是灭尽定的基础,能成办一切事务,赐予一切世间与出世间的功德,应当如此了知。为了显示它所带来的功德中的一部分,世尊说:“他如此入定的心……”等等。巴利
Bhagavatā panidaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ bodhirukkhamūle nibbattitaṃ, taṃ tassa vipassanāpādakañceva ahosi abhiññāpādakañca nirodhapādakañca sabbakiccasādhakañca sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti veditabbaṃ. Yesañca guṇānaṃ dāyakaṃ ahosi, tesaṃ ekadesaṃ dassento ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte’’tiādimāha.
这里,“彼”指的就是我。“如是”是显示进入第四禅的次第。这句话的意思是:依照这个次第证得第四禅。“入定”是指以这第四禅的定而入了定。“清净”等词中,因为舍念清净而清净;正因为清净,所以洁白,也就是说明亮。“无秽”是指:由于断除了乐等诸缘,摧毁了贪等污秽,所以无秽;正因为无秽,所以远离随烦恼,因为污秽会染污心。由于善加修习而柔软,也就是达到了自在。能随自在运作的心,就称为柔软。正因为柔软,所以堪任,也就是堪能作业、适合作业。柔软的心就像精炼过的黄金一样堪能作业,而柔软和堪任这两者,都是因为善加修习才有的。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,我看不到有别的任何一法,像心这样经过修习、多修习之后,变得如此柔软、如此堪任。”巴利
Tattha soti so ahaṃ. Evanti catutthajjhānakkamanidassanametaṃ. Iminā kamena catutthajjhānaṃ paṭilabhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāhiteti iminā catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite. Parisuddhetiādīsu pana upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhe. Parisuddhattāyeva pariyodāte, pabhassareti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ ghātena vihatarāgādiaṅgaṇattā anaṅgaṇe. Anaṅgaṇattāyeva ca vigatūpakkilese; aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissati. Subhāvitattā mudubhūte, vasībhāvappatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ mudūti vuccati. Muduttāyeva ca kammaniye, kammakkhame kammayoggeti vuttaṃ hoti. Mudu hi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti sudhantamiva suvaṇṇaṃ, tadubhayampi ca subhāvitattā eva. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ bahulīkataṃ mudu ca hoti kammaniyañca, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.22).
安住于这些清净等状态,所以叫“住立”。正因为住立,才说达到不动、不动摇、无染污。或者,因为柔软、适业而能随自己心意安住,所以叫“住立”;因为被信等法所摄持,所以达到不动。因为被信摄持的心不会因无信而动摇,被精进摄持的心不会因懈怠而动摇,被念摄持的心不会因放逸而动摇,被定摄持的心不会因掉举而动摇,被慧摄持的心不会因无明而动摇,被光明摄持的心不会因烦恼的黑暗而动摇。被这六种法摄持的心,就达到不动。这样具足八支的心,就能堪任引导,能以证智证得那些应当以证智证得的法。巴利
Etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsu ṭhitattā ṭhite. Ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappatte, acale niriñjaneti vuttaṃ hoti. Mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhite, saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappatte. Saddhāpariggahitañhi cittaṃ assaddhiyena na iñjati, vīriyapariggahitaṃ kosajjena na iñjati, satipariggahitaṃ pamādena na iñjati, samādhipariggahitaṃ uddhaccena na iñjati, paññāpariggahitaṃ avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakārena na iñjati. Imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya.
另一种说法:以第四禅的定而得到等持,因为远离了五盖而清净,因为超越了寻等而明净,因为没有那些由证得禅那而产生的、属于欲求界的恶法而无垢,因为贪欲等心随烦恼的消失而离随烦恼。这两者都应依照《离垢经》等(中部1.57等)来理解。因为达到了自在而柔软,因为成就了神足而适合作业,因为修习圆满而达到殊胜、住立、达到不动。意思是:就像达到不动那样而住立。如此具足八支的心,就能堪任引导,能够以证智证得那些应被证智证得的法,也就是说,它成为基础、成为近因。巴利
Aparo nayo – catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite. Nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddhe. Vitakkādisamatikkamena pariyodāte. Jhānappaṭilābhapaccayānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇe. Abhijjhādīnaṃ cittūpakkilesānaṃ vigamena vigatūpakkilese. Ubhayampi cetaṃ anaṅgaṇavatthasuttānusārena (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo) veditabbaṃ. Vasippattiyā mudubhūte. Iddhipādabhāvūpagamena kammaniye. Bhāvanāpāripūriyā paṇītabhāvūpagamena ṭhiteāneñjappatte. Yathā āneñjappattaṃ hoti; evaṃ ṭhiteti attho. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtanti attho.
为了宿住随念智:当这样成为证智基础的心生起时,在这个心中,为了那宿住随念中的智。其中,宿住是指过去在已过去的生中曾住过的诸蕴。曾住是指曾经住过、曾经经验过,在自己的相续中生起后又灭去的曾住之法;或者以行境之住而住;被自己的识所知、所限定;或者也被他人的识所知,比如在忆念断灭之途等中。宿住随念是指以那念随念宿住,那即是宿住随念。智是指与那念相应的智。如此,为了这宿住随念智——为了证得此智——而这样说。引导是指引导出来。巴利
Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāyāti evaṃ abhiññāpādake jāte etasmiṃ citte pubbenivāsānussatimhi yaṃ ñāṇaṃ tadatthāya. Tattha pubbenivāsoti pubbe atītajātīsu nivutthakkhandhā. Nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā, gocaranivāsena nivutthā, attano viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnā, paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsu. Pubbenivāsānussatīti yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussati. Ñāṇanti tāya satiyā sampayuttañāṇaṃ. Evamimassa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa atthāya pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇāya etassa ñāṇassa adhigamāya pattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Abhininnāmesinti abhinīhariṃ.
“我”就是指我。“种种”是指多种多样,或者是以种种方式发生、被说明的意思。“宿住”是指以刚刚过去的那个生命为起点,在各处曾经住过的相续。“随念”是指“一生、二生……”这样沿着生命的次第一直追溯、一直追溯而忆念,或者说是随顺而忆念,这表明心一旦被引导过去就能忆念起来。已经圆满巴拉密的大士们不需要先做准备工作,所以他们只要把心引导过去就能忆念。但初学的善男子必须先做完准备工作才能忆念,因此针对他们来说,预备行是应该要讲的。可是如果讲那个预备行,就太繁重了,会变成像律藏因缘部分那样,所以我们不讲。想要了解的人,应该按照《清净道论》(清净道论2.402等)里所说的方法去掌握。在这里,我们只注解圣典本身。巴利
Soti so ahaṃ. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ saṃvaṇṇitanti attho. Pubbenivāsanti samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussarāmīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭiyā anugantvā anugantvā sarāmi, anudeva vā sarāmi, citte abhininnāmitamatte eva sarāmīti dasseti. Pūritapāramīnañhi mahāpurisānaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi, tena te cittaṃ abhininnāmetvāva saranti. Ādikammikakulaputtā pana parikammaṃ katvāva saranti, tasmā tesaṃ vasena parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ pana vuccamānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karoti, tasmā taṃ na vadāma. Atthikehi pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402 ādayo) vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Idha pana pāḷimeva vaṇṇayissāma.
“就像这样”这个词,是用来显示前面所说的种类的。正是为了显示那已经说出的宿住智的种类差别,才说了“一生”等等。其中,“一生”是指从结生开始、到死亡结束,属于一个生命存在中的五蕴相续。“二生”等等也是同样的道理。而在“许多坏劫”等等当中,则应当理解为:正在毁坏的劫是坏劫,正在生成的劫是成劫。其中,坏劫已经包含了坏住劫,因为坏住劫以坏劫为根本;成劫也包含了成住劫。这样一来,经文中所说的“比丘们,劫有这四种不可计数。哪四种?坏、坏住、成、成住”,就全部都被涵盖在内了。巴利
Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāradassanatthe nipāto. Teneva yvāyaṃ pubbenivāso āraddho, tassa pakārappabhedaṃ dassento ekampi jātintiādimāha. Tattha ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsu. Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo, vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti veditabbo. Tattha ca saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito hoti tammūlakattā. Vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni tāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni . Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī, vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti vuttāni tāni sabbāni pariggahitāni honti.
其中,有三种坏灭:火坏灭、水坏灭、风坏灭。三种坏灭的界限是:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫以火坏灭时,从光音天以下都被火烧尽。当劫以水坏灭时,从遍净天以下都被水消融。当劫以风坏灭时,从广果天以下都被风摧毁。不过,从广的范围来说,任何时候都是一个佛刹在毁灭。巴利
Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā – tejosaṃvaṭṭo, āposaṃvaṭṭo, vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā – ābhassarā, subhakiṇhā, vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā udakena saṃvaṭṭati, subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vātena saṃvaṭṭati, vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsiyati. Vitthārato pana sadāpi ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati.
佛刹有三种:出生刹、教令刹和境界刹。其中,出生刹以一万个轮围世界为范围,如来入胎等时它会震动。教令刹以百千俱胝个轮围世界为范围。在这个范围内,《宝经》《蕴经》《幢顶经》《阿塔那帝亚经》《孔雀经》这些护卫经的威力能够起作用。境界刹则是无边的、不可计量的,就像经文里说的:“如果他愿意,就能随念任何地方。”在那里,他想要什么,就能随念什么。在这三种佛刹中,一个教令刹会毁灭。当它毁灭时,出生刹也已经毁灭了;它们毁灭时是一起毁灭的,形成时也是一起形成的。关于它的毁灭和形成,在《清净道论》里已经说过。想要了解的人应当从那里去掌握。巴利
Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti – jātikkhettaṃ, āṇākkhettaṃ, visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhiādīsu kampati. Āṇākkhettaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti. Yattha ratanaparittaṃ, khandhaparittaṃ, dhajaggaparittaṃ, āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ, moraparittanti imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo pavattati. Visayakkhettaṃ pana anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti (a. ni. 3.81) vuttaṃ yattha yaṃ yaṃ ākaṅkhati taṃ taṃ anussarati. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati. Tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettampi vinaṭṭhameva hoti; vinassantañca ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantampi ekatova saṇṭhahati. Tassa vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.404) vuttaṃ. Atthikehi tato gahetabbaṃ.
那些所说的坏劫与成劫,世尊坐在菩提道场,为了证得正自觉,忆念了许多坏劫、许多成劫、许多坏成劫。怎样忆念呢?是按照“我曾在那里”这样的方式。其中,“我曾在那里”的意思是:在那个坏劫中,我曾在那样的存在、那样的生处、那样的趣、那样的识住、那样的有情居、那样的有情聚中。名字是这样:或者叫韦桑德拉,或者叫护明。种姓是这样:或者姓跋伽婆,或者姓乔达摩。肤色是这样:或者白,或者黑。食物是这样:或者吃米饭肉食,或者吃自然落下的果实。这样感受苦乐:以种种方式感受属于身体和心的、分为有依与无依等各种类别的苦与乐。寿命长短是这样:寿命最长百岁,或者寿命最长八万四千劫。巴利
Ye panete saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭā vuttā, etesu bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhanatthāya nisinno anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappe anekepi vivaṭṭakappe anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe sari. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Amutrāsi’’ntiādinā nayena. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe ahaṃ amumhi bhave vā yoniyā vā gatiyā vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmoti vessantaro vā jotipālo vā. Evaṃgottoti bhaggavo vā gotamo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparamāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasahassaparamāyupariyanto vā.
从那里命终之后,在别处再生起:那个我从那个存在、生处、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚死后,又在名为某某的存在、生处、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中再生起。在那里我也曾存在:接着,在那个存在、生处、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中,我又再次存在过。名为如此等等,都按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Sotato cuto amutra udapādinti so ahaṃ tato bhavato yonito gatito viññāṇaṭṭhitito sattāvāsato sattanikāyato vā cuto, puna amukasmiṃ nāma bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā udapādiṃ. Tatrāpāsinti atha tatrāpi bhave yoniyā gatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyā sattāvāse sattanikāye vā puna ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttanayameva.
或者也可以这样理解:因为“我曾在那里”这句话,是顺着次第上升时,随自己的意愿而忆念;“从那里死后”,则是返回时所作的观察。因此,“在这里投生”应当理解为:紧接在这里投生之前,在那里出生,指的是兜率天。“在那里我也曾是这样,名叫这个”,是说在兜率天里,我曾是名叫白幢的天子。“姓是这样”,是说和那些天人同一个姓。“容貌是这样”,是说金色的容貌。“食物是这样”,是说以天界的净食为食。“这样感受苦乐”,是说如此领受天界的快乐,而苦则只是行苦。“寿限如此”,是说寿限为五十七俱胝又六百万岁。“他从那里死后”,是说我从兜率天死后。“在此处再生”,是说在此处,于摩诃摩耶的胎中结生。巴利
Atha vā yasmā amutrāsinti idaṃ anupubbena ārohantassa yāvadicchakaṃ saraṇaṃ. So tato cutoti paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā idhūpapannoti imissā idhūpapattiyā anantaraṃ amutra udapādinti tusitabhavanaṃ sandhāyāhāti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāpāsiṃ evaṃnāmoti tatrāpi tusitabhavane setaketu nāma devaputto ahosiṃ. Evaṃgottoti tāhi devatāhi saddhiṃ ekagotto. Evaṃvaṇṇoti suvaṇṇavaṇṇo. Evamāhāroti dibbasudhāhāro. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti evaṃ dibbasukhappaṭisaṃvedī. Dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattameva. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ sattapaññāsavassakoṭisaṭṭhivassasatasahassāyupariyanto. So tato cutoti so ahaṃ tato tusitabhavanato cuto. Idhūpapannoti idha mahāmāyāya deviyā kucchimhi nibbatto.
“如是”就是“这样”。“具有相状、具有称谓”是说:从名和姓的角度说是有称谓,从肤色等的角度说是有相状。因为众生是依名和姓被指称为“达多、帝须、乔达摩”;又依肤色等而被认作白、黑等种种差别。所以,名和姓是称谓,其余的是相状。那么,是不是只有诸佛才能忆念宿住呢?回答说:不是只有诸佛,独觉佛、佛弟子、外道也能忆念,但并不是没有差别。外道只能忆念四十劫,不能再超过。为什么?因为他们智慧薄弱。由于他们没有名色分别,智慧就薄弱。在弟子当中,八十位大弟子能忆念十万劫;两位上首弟子能忆念一个阿僧祇又十万劫。独觉佛能忆念两个阿僧祇又十万劫。这是他们的愿力所达到的范围。而诸佛则没有限量,想忆念多久就能忆念多久。外道只能按蕴的次第忆念,不能抛开次第而以死生相续的方式忆念。他们就像盲人一样,不能随意进入自己想要去的地方。弟子们两种方式都能忆念,独觉佛也是这样。而诸佛无论按蕴的次第,还是以死生相续的方式,还是以狮子跃入的方式,在无数俱胝劫中,向下或向上,无论想忆念哪个地方,全都能忆念。巴利
Itīti evaṃ. Sākāraṃ sauddesanti nāmagottavasena sauddesaṃ, vaṇṇādivasena sākāraṃ. Nāmagottavasena hi satto ‘‘datto, tisso, gotamo’’ti uddisīyati; vaṇṇādīhi odāto, sāmoti nānattato paññāyati; tasmā nāmagottaṃ uddeso, itare ākārā. Kiṃ pana buddhāyeva pubbenivāsaṃ sarantīti? Vuccate – na buddhāyeva, paccekabuddha-buddhasāvaka-titthiyāpi, no ca kho avisesena. Titthiyā hi cattālīsaṃyeva kappe saranti, na tato paraṃ. Kasmā? Dubbalapaññattā. Tesañhi nāmarūpaparicchedavirahato dubbalā paññā hoti. Sāvakesu pana asītimahāsāvakā kappasatasahassaṃ saranti; dve aggasāvakā ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ satasahassañca. Paccekabuddhā dve asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāro. Buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthi, yāva icchanti tāva saranti. Titthiyā ca khandhapaṭipāṭimeva saranti. Paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā cutipaṭisandhivasena sarituṃ na sakkonti. Tesañhi andhānaṃ viya icchitappadesokkamanaṃ natthi. Sāvakā ubhayathāpi saranti; tathā paccekabuddhā. Buddhā pana khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi cutipaṭisandhivasenapi sīhokkantavasenapi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ ākaṅkhanti, taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyeva.
在“婆罗门,这是我的……”等句中,“我的”指的是“由我”。“明”是以令知为义,所以叫“明”。它令知什么呢?令知宿住。“无明”是对那宿住不能令知,所以把覆盖它的痴称为“无明”。“暗”就是那痴本身,因为它有覆盖的作用,所以称为“暗”。“光”就是那明本身,因为它有照亮的作用,所以称为“光”。在这里,“明已证得”是主要的意思,其余的话是赞叹。这里的连接关系是:婆罗门,这明确实已由我证得;对于已证得明的我,无明已被破坏,也就是已灭尽。为什么呢?因为明已生起。这个道理也适用于其余两个词句。巴利
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādīsu meti mayā. Vijjāti viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsaṃ. Avijjāti tasseva pubbenivāsassa aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena tappaṭicchādakamoho vuccati. Tamoti sveva moho tappaṭicchādakaṭṭhena ‘‘tamo’’ti vuccati. Ālokoti sāyevavijjā obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘āloko’’ti vuccati. Ettha ca vijjā adhigatāti ayaṃ attho, sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacanaṃ. Yojanā panettha – ayaṃ kho me vijjā adhigatā, tassa me adhigatavijjassa avijjā vihatā, vinaṭṭhāti attho. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannā. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvaye.
这里,“如”是譬喻的意思,“那”是个不变词。以正念不散乱而安住于不放逸,以精进的热忱而安住于勤勇,对身体和生命都不顾恋,所以是已策励心——也就是心已被派遣、被推动的意思。这段话要表达的是:就像一个人不放逸、勤勇、已策励心而安住时,无明会被破坏,明会生起,黑暗会被破坏,光明会生起;同样地,我的无明已被破坏,明已生起,黑暗已被破坏,光明已生起。我这样投入精勤修行,得到的正是与它相应的果报。巴利
Yathā tanti ettha yathāti opammatthe. Tanti nipāto. Satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa. Vīriyātāpena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhatāya pahitattassa, pesitacittassāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharato avijjā vihaññeyya vijjā uppajjeyya, tamo vihaññeyya āloko uppajjeyya; evameva mama avijjā vihatā vijjā uppannā, tamo vihato āloko uppanno. Etassa me padhānānuyogassa anurūpameva phalaṃ laddhanti.
婆罗门,这就是我的第一次破壳而出,就像小鸡从蛋壳里出来一样。婆罗门,这就是我以宿住随念智为嘴喙,啄破那覆盖过去世所积诸蕴的无明蛋壳之后,第一次破壳而出、第一次出来、第一次圣生;就像小鸡用嘴喙或脚爪尖啄破蛋壳后,从那个蛋壳里破出来、出来,投生到鸡群当中。巴利
Ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇa paṭhamā abhinibbhidā ahosi kukkuṭacchāpakasseva aṇḍakosamhāti ayaṃ kho mama brāhmaṇa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbe nivutthakkhandhapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā paṭhamā abhinibbhidā paṭhamā nikkhanti paṭhamā ariyājāti ahosi, kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti.
天眼智论巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā
13 13. “他如此……乃至……死生智”:是指对死与生的智慧;通过这种智慧,能了知众生的死与生,这就是那句话所要表达的意思。“引导心转向”:是指引出遍作心。然而在“我以天眼……乃至……看见”这一段里,对于已圆满巴拉密的大士们来说,并没有遍作的预备修行。因为他们只要把心转向,当下就能以天眼看见众生;而初学的善男子则需要先作遍作。因此,应当从初学者的角度来说明遍作。但如果解释这个遍作,会使律藏的因缘部分变得过于冗长,所以我们不作解说。有志者应依照《清净道论》中所说的方法去了解。在这里,我们只解说圣典本身的文义。巴利
13.Soevaṃ…pe… cutūpapātañāṇāyāti cutiyā ca upapāte ca ñāṇāya; yena ñāṇena sattānaṃ cuti ca upapāto ca ñāyati, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti parikammacittaṃ nīhariṃ. So dibbena…pe… passāmīti ettha pana pūritapāramīnaṃ mahāsattānaṃ parikammakaraṇaṃ natthi. Te hi citte abhininnāmitamatte eva dibbena cakkhunā satte passanti, ādikammikakulaputtā pana parikammaṃ katvā. Tasmā tesaṃ vasena parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ pana vuccamānaṃ atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karoti; tasmā taṃ na vadāma. Atthikehi pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Idha pana pāḷimeva vaṇṇayissāma.
所谓“我”,就是那个我。在“以天……”等说法里,因为与天相似,所以叫“天的”。诸天神的眼是由善业所生,不被胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,远离种种杂染,因此即使很远也能接收所缘,这就是他们的净色眼,也就是天眼。而这里这个由精进修行之力所生的智眼,也和它一样,所以因为与天相似,就叫“天的”;又因为是通过天住而获得的,而且自身也依止天住,所以叫“天的”;又因为以光明摄取境界,具有大光辉,所以叫“天的”;又因为能看见穿墙等处的色法,具有大行境,所以叫“天的”。这一切应当依照声论典来理解。以能见为义,所以叫“眼”。因为能执行眼的作用,就像眼一样,所以也叫“眼”。因为能看见死与生,是见清净的原因,所以叫“清净”。如果只看见死而看不见生,就会执取断见;如果只看见生而看不见死,就会执取新众生出现的见解。如果两者都看见,那么因为超越了这两种邪见,他的这种见就成为见清净的原因。世尊两者都看见了,因此这样说:“因为能看见死与生,是见清净的原因,所以叫清净。”巴利
Soti so ahaṃ. Dibbenātiādīsu dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavinimuttatāya dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idañcāpi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattā attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu. Cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati, tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Tadubhayañca bhagavā addasa. Tenetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti.
由于远离十一种随烦恼,所以是清净的。世尊的天眼确实远离了十一种随烦恼。就像经中所说:“阿那律,我这样了知‘疑是心的随烦恼’之后,就断除了疑这个心的随烦恼。不作意……昏沉睡眠……惊悚……兴奋……粗重……过度精进……过于懈怠……欲求……种种想……‘过度注视诸色是心的随烦恼’,我这样了知之后,就断除了过度注视诸色这个心的随烦恼。阿那律,我这样不放逸、热忱、坚定地安住时,能觉知光明却看不见色,或者看得见色却不能觉知光明。”如此等等。这就是因为远离了十一种随烦恼而清净。巴利
Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Bhagavato hi ekādasapakkilesavirahitaṃ dibbacakkhu. Yathāha – ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, anuruddha, ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. Amanasikāro…pe… thinamiddhaṃ… chambhitattaṃ… uppilaṃ… duṭṭhullaṃ… accāraddhavīriyaṃ… atilīnavīriyaṃ… abhijappā… nānattasaññā… ‘atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. So kho ahaṃ, anuruddha, appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi. Rūpāni hi kho passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.242-243) evamādi. Tadevaṃ ekādasupakkilesavirahato visuddhaṃ.
超越了人间的范围,以见色而言,是超越人间的;或者因为超越了人的肉眼,所以应当理解为超越人间的。以那清净的、超越人间的天眼。巴利
Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ; mānusakaṃ vā maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā atikkantamānusakanti veditabbaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
“我看见众生”:就像用人的肉眼一样,我用天眼看见、观察、注视众生。“正在死去和正在投生”:在这里,天眼无法看见死亡那一刹那或投生那一刹那;不过,那些临近死亡、马上就要死去的众生,叫做“正在死去”;那些已经取得结生、或者刚刚出生的众生,叫做“正在投生”。他这样显示:“我看见这样正在死去和正在投生的众生。”
“卑贱”:因为与痴的等流相应,所以因出身、家族、财富等而被轻视、被蔑视、被鄙夷、被看不起。“高贵”:因为不与痴的等流相应,所以与上面相反。“美貌”:因为与无嗔的等流相应,所以具有可爱、可意、悦人的容貌。“丑陋”:因为与嗔的等流相应,所以具有不可爱、不可意、不悦人的容貌;也有“美丽”和“丑陋”的意思。“善趣”:在善趣中;或者因为与无贪的等流相应,所以是富有、拥有大财富的。“恶趣”:在恶趣中;或者因为与贪的等流相应,所以是贫穷、缺少饮食的。“随业而生”:随其所积累的各种业,各各投生到相应的去处。在这里,前面用“正在死去”等句子说明了天眼的作用;而这一句则说明了随业生智的作用。巴利
Sattepassāmīti manussamaṃsacakkhunā viya satte passāmi dakkhāmi olokemi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe vā upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā, ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti te cavamānā. Ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampatinibbattā vā, te upapajjamānāti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne ca passāmīti dasseti. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīnaṃ vasena hīḷite ohīḷite uññāte avaññāte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantaamanāpavaṇṇayutte; abhirūpe virūpetipi attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ; iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ.
这个智的生起过程是这样的:他先向下朝地狱的方向扩展光明,看见地狱众生正在承受巨大的痛苦,这种看见只是天眼的作用。他接着这样作意:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才承受这样的痛苦?”这时,以那个业为所缘的智就生起了,知道“他们是造了这样的业”。同样,他向上朝天界的方向扩展光明,看见欢喜园、杂林园、粗涩园等处的众生正在享受广大的福乐。这种看见也只是天眼的作用。他这样作意:“这些众生到底造了什么业,才享受这样的福乐?”这时,以那个业为所缘的智就生起了,知道“他们是造了这样的业”。这叫做随业生智。它没有单独的遍作。未来分智也是这样。因为这些智都以天眼为基础,和天眼一起成就。巴利
Tassa ca ñāṇassa ayamuppattikkamo – so heṭṭhā nirayābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayikasatte passati mahantaṃ dukkhamanubhavamāne, taṃ dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti – ‘‘kinnu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ dukkhamanubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃ kammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Tathā upari devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nandanavana-missakavana-phārusakavanādīsu satte passati mahāsampattiṃ anubhavamāne. Tampi dassanaṃ dibbacakkhukiccameva. So evaṃ manasi karoti – ‘‘kinnu kho kammaṃ katvā ime sattā etaṃ sampattiṃ anubhavantī’’ti? Athassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma katvā’’ti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Idaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ nāma. Imassa visuṃ parikammaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā cimassa, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapi. Dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
在讲到“身恶行”等词时,所谓恶行,就是恶劣的行为,或者因为被烦恼所腐坏而成为恶劣的行为,所以叫恶行;以身所作的恶行,或者从身生起的恶行,就叫身恶行。语恶行和意恶行也应当这样理解。“具足”就是具备。“诽谤圣者”是指对佛陀、独觉佛、佛陀的弟子这些圣者,甚至对最下位的在家入流者,怀着想害他们的心,用根本事来诽谤,或者用毁坏功德的方式来诽谤;也就是辱骂、指责。其中,说“这些人没有沙门法,他们不是沙门”,这是用根本事来诽谤。说“他们没有禅那、没有解脱、没有道、没有果”,这是用毁坏功德来诽谤,应当这样理解。不管他是知道而诽谤,还是不知道而诽谤,两种情况下都属于诽谤圣者。这是很重的业,会障碍生天,也会障碍圣道,但它是可以忏悔净除的。为了说明这一点,下面举出这个例子——巴利
Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu duṭṭhu caritaṃ duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattāti duccaritaṃ; kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Evaṃ vacīmanoduccaritānipi daṭṭhabbāni. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃ upavādakāti buddha-paccekabuddha-buddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ antamaso gihisotāpannānampi anatthakāmā hutvā antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā; akkosakā, garahakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo, assamaṇā ete’’ti vadanto antimavatthunā upavadati. ‘‘Natthi imesaṃ jhānaṃ vā vimokkho vā maggo vā phalaṃ vā’’ti vadanto guṇaparidhaṃsanena upavadatīti veditabbo. So ca jānaṃ vā upavadeyya ajānaṃ vā, ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hoti. Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca, satekicchaṃ pana hoti. Tassa ca āvibhāvatthaṃ idaṃ vatthumudāharanti –
据说在某个村子里,有一位长老和一位年轻比丘一起托钵乞食。他们刚到第一家,就得到了大约一勺的热粥。长老有腹风病。他想:“这粥对我有好处,趁它还没凉,我先喝了。”于是,他坐在人们搬来准备劈柴的木桩上,把粥喝了。那位年轻比丘对此很厌恶:“这位老比丘也太贪吃了,让我们丢脸。”长老在村里乞食后回到精舍,对年轻比丘说:“贤友,你在这教法中有没有证得什么?” “是的,尊者,我是入流者。” “那么,贤友,你不必再为更高的道果努力了,因为你已经诽谤了漏已尽者。”于是年轻比丘向长老请求原谅,他的过失因此恢复清净。所以,如果有人诽谤圣者,应当前去,如果自己比对方年长,就说:“我对尊者说了如此这般的话,请原谅我。”这样请求原谅。如果自己比较年轻,就顶礼、蹲跪、合掌,说:“尊者,我对您说了如此这般的话,请您原谅我。”这样请求原谅。如果对方不接受,或者已经去了别的地方,就去住在那个精舍的比丘们那里,如果自己比较年长,站着说就可以;如果比较年轻,就蹲跪合掌,说:“诸位尊者,我曾对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,愿那位尊者原谅我。”这样请求原谅。如果那位圣者已经般涅槃,就去他般涅槃的地方,甚至到墓地,也要请求原谅。这样做,就不会障碍生天、不会障碍圣道,过失就恢复清净了。巴利
‘‘Aññatarasmiṃ kira gāme eko thero ca daharabhikkhu ca piṇḍāya caranti. Te paṭhamaghareyeva uḷuṅkamattaṃ uṇhayāguṃ labhiṃsu. Therassa ca kucchivāto atthi. So cintesi – ‘ayaṃ yāgu mayhaṃ sappāyā, yāva na sītalā hoti tāva naṃ pivāmī’ti. So manussehi ummāratthāya āhaṭe dārukkhandhe nisīditvā taṃ pivi. Itaro taṃ jigucchi – ‘aticchāto vatāyaṃ mahallako amhākaṃ lajjitabbakaṃ akāsī’ti. Thero gāme caritvā vihāraṃ gantvā daharabhikkhuṃ āha – ‘atthi te, āvuso, imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’ti? ‘Āma, bhante, sotāpanno aha’nti. ‘Tena hāvuso, uparimaggatthāya vāyāmaṃ mā akāsi, khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’ti. So taṃ khamāpesi. Tenassa taṃ pākatikaṃ ahosi’’. Tasmā yo aññopi ariyaṃ upavadati, tena gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ‘‘ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamāhī’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace navakataro hoti , vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ bhante tumhe idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me khamathā’’ti khamāpetabbo. Sace so nakkhamati disāpakkanto vā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti ṭhitakeneva, sace navakataro ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’’ti evaṃ vadantena khamāpetabbo. Sace so parinibbuto hoti, parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā yāva sivathikaṃ gantvāpi khamāpetabbo. Evaṃ kate saggāvaraṇañca maggāvaraṇañca na hoti, pākatikameva hoti.
“邪见者”就是颠倒的看法。“受持邪见业者”是指因为邪见而受持各种各样业的人,还包括那些劝人受持以邪见为根本的身业等等的人。在这里,语恶行本身就已经包含了诽谤圣者,意恶行本身也已经包含了邪见,却还要再把这两者单独提出来说一遍,应当知道这是为了显示它们具有极大的过失。因为诽谤圣者的过失确实极重,跟无间业差不多。正如经中所说:“舍利弗,就像一位比丘具足戒、具足定、具足慧,能在现世中证得阿拉汉。舍利弗,我说这个人如果不舍弃那语、不舍弃那心、不舍弃那见,就会像被拖来扔下去一样,就这样堕入地狱。”巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhivasena samādinnanānāvidhakammā, ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Tattha vacīduccaritaggahaṇeneva ariyūpavāde, manoduccaritaggahaṇena ca micchādiṭṭhiyā saṅgahitāyapi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya; evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto, evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
除了邪见之外,再没有别的法会有那么大的过失了。就像经里说的:比丘们,我看不到还有任何别的法会像邪见这样有那么大的过失。比丘们,邪见是一切过失中最严重的。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha – ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ, yathayidaṃ, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
“身坏”是指舍弃了执取的五蕴。“命终后”是指在紧接着那之后执取新生的五蕴。或者,“身坏”是指命根的断绝;“命终后”是指从死亡心识之后。“恶趣”等这一切都是地狱的别名。因为地狱没有被认为是通向天界和解脱之因的福乐,所以叫恶趣;或者因为没有乐的因由,所以叫恶趣。它是苦的去处和归宿,所以叫恶道;或者因为嗔恚多,由恶业所生之处,所以叫恶道。造恶业的人在这里没有自在而坠落,所以叫坠堕;或者在这里肢节毁坏而坠落,所以叫坠堕。这里没有可爱的乐,所以叫地狱。巴利
Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Athavā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassupacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cuticittato uddhaṃ. Apāyanti evamādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati; dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gatīti duggati. Vivasā nipatanti ettha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto; vinassantā vā ettha nipatanti sambhijjamānaṅgapaccaṅgāti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
或者,用“恶趣”这个词来说明畜生道。畜生道确实属于恶趣,因为它远离了善趣;但它不算恶道,因为有大威力的龙王等众生出生在那里。用“恶道”这个词来说明饿鬼界。饿鬼界既是恶趣又是恶道,因为它远离了善趣,又是苦的去处;但它不算坠堕,因为不像阿修罗那样坠落——有大威力的饿鬼也有宫殿现起。用“坠堕”这个词来说明阿修罗身。阿修罗身按上面说的道理,既是恶趣又是恶道,而且因为从一切荣华中坠落,所以称为坠堕。用“地狱”这个词来说明无间地狱等多种地狱。“往生”意思是到达、生于那里。反过来,白分应当按相反的方式理解。巴利
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti. Tiracchānayoni hi apāyo, sugatiyā apetattā; na duggati, mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ dīpeti. So hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā, dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā; na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Petamahiddhikānañhi vimānānipi nibbattanti. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ dīpeti. So hi yathāvuttenatthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sabbasamussayehi ca vinipatitattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīci-ādianekappakāraṃ nirayameva dīpeti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
这里有一个差别:在这里,用“善趣”这个词,人趣也被包括进去了;用“天”这个词,则只指天趣。其中,美好的去处就是善趣;在色等所缘中最为殊胜,所以叫天。这一切都因为坏灭、崩解的含义而称为世间,这是从词义上说的。明是指天眼智明。无明是指遮蔽众生死亡与结生的无明。其余部分和前面说的一样。这里唯一的差别是:就像在宿住随念的讲述中说的“以宿住随念智的嘴喙,啄破了遮蔽过去所住诸蕴的无明卵壳”;在这里则应该说“以死生智的嘴喙,啄破了遮蔽死生的无明卵壳”。巴利
Ayaṃ pana viseso – ettha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhati. Saggaggahaṇena devagatiyeva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādivisayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Vijjāti dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjā. Avijjāti sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayameva hettha viseso – yathā pubbenivāsakathāyaṃ ‘‘pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇamukhatuṇḍakena pubbenivutthakkhandhapaacchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vuttaṃ; evamidha ‘‘cutūpapātañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena cutūpapātapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā’’ti vattabbanti.
关于漏尽智的讨论巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
14 心如此得定时——这里应当理解为作为观禅基础的第四禅心。为了诸漏的灭尽智——也就是为了阿拉汉道智。因为阿拉汉道能灭尽诸漏,所以称为诸漏的灭尽,而这里的智就属于那个道。引导心——就是引导观禅的心。我如实了知“这是苦”等——在这些话中,我以通达自性相的方式,如实遍知、了知、证悟了一切苦谛,确认“苦只有这么多,没有比这更多的”;对于那苦的生起之因——渴爱,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是苦集”;对于这两者灭尽后不再生起的那个境界,也就是涅槃,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是苦灭”;对于能达成那涅槃的圣道,我如实遍知、了知、证悟了“这是导向苦灭之道”。应当这样理解其中的含义。巴利
14.Soevaṃ samāhite citteti idha vipassanāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyāti arahattamaggañāṇatthāya. Arahattamaggo hi āsavavināsanato āsavānaṃ khayoti vuccati. Tatra cetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tappariyāpannattāti . Cittaṃ abhininnāmesinti vipassanācittaṃ abhinīhariṃ. So idaṃ dukkhanti evamādīsu ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti sabbampi dukkhasaccaṃ sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhiṃ. Tassa ca dukkhassa nibbattikaṃ taṇhaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti, tadubhayampi yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvā nirujjhati taṃ tesaṃ appavattiṃ nibbānaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodho’’ti, tassa ca sampāpakaṃ ariyamaggaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhena yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ jāniṃ paṭivijjhinti evamattho veditabbo.
像这样从自性上显示了诸谛之后,现在又从烦恼的角度、以不同的方式来说明,于是说了“这些漏”等话。“我如此知、如此见”——这是说,对如此知、如此见的我,连同毗婆舍那一起,宣说了达到顶点的道。“欲漏”——就是从欲漏。“已解脱”——以此显示果的刹那。因为在道的刹那,心正在解脱;在果的刹那,心已解脱。“在解脱中有‘已解脱’的智”——以此显示省察智。“生已尽”等,是显示这种智的范围。世尊以那种智省察时,彻底了知了“生已尽”等。那么,世尊的什么“生”已尽?他又怎样彻底了知它呢?回答是:不是他过去的生已尽,因为过去早已灭尽;不是未来的生,因为未来没有努力使其灭尽;不是现在的生,因为它正存在着。然而,由于未修习道而可能在未来生起的生——在一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有中,以一个、四个、五个蕴的差别而有的种种生——由于道已修习,它达到了不再生起的性质,所以说已尽。他省察了由修道所断除的烦恼后,了知“在烦恼灭尽时,即使有业存在,未来也不会再结生”,从而彻底了知了“生已尽”。巴利
Evaṃ sarūpato saccāni dassetvā idāni kilesavasena pariyāyato dassento ‘‘ime āsavā’’tiādimāha. Tassa me evaṃ jānato evaṃ passatoti tassa mayhaṃ evaṃ jānantassa evaṃ passantassa saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ katheti. Kāmāsavāti kāmāsavato. Vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Maggakkhaṇe hi cittaṃ vimuccati, phalakkhaṇe vimuttaṃ hoti. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇanti iminā paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dasseti. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmiṃ. Tena hi ñāṇena bhagavā paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni abbhaññāsiṃ. Katamā pana bhagavato jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ abbhaññāsīti? Vuccate – na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā, pubbeva khīṇattā; na anāgatā, anāgate vāyāmābhāvato; na paccuppannā, vijjamānattā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā; taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā ‘‘kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotī’’ti jānanto abbhaññāsiṃ.
“已住”是指已经住过、完全住过,也就是已作、已行、已完成。“梵行”是指道梵行。因为连同凡夫善人在内,七有学被称为在住梵行之住,而漏已尽者则是已住之人。所以世尊省察自己的梵行之住时,了知“梵行已住”。“应作已作”是指:对四谛,通过四种道,以遍知、断除、证悟、修习的证入方式,完成了十六种应作之事。因为凡夫善人等还在做这件事,而漏已尽者则是应作已作者。所以世尊省察自己的应作之事时,了知“应作已作”。“不再有此状态”是指:如今,为了再有这种状态,也就是为了再有这十六种应作之事,或者为了烦恼的灭尽,我再也没有修道应作之事了,如此了知。巴利
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ, puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso. Tasmā bhagavā attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti abbhaññāsiṃ. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho . Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi etaṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā bhagavā attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti abbhaññāsiṃ. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃ soḷasakiccabhāvāya kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti abbhaññāsiṃ.
现在,为了向婆罗门说明这个已经被省察智掌握、证得诸漏灭尽智的过程,世尊说了“婆罗门,这是我的……”等话。其中,“明”是指阿拉汉道智之明。“无明”是指遮蔽四圣谛的无明。其余部分和前面说的一样。但这里有一处不同:在“婆罗门,这是我的第三次破壳而出”这句话里,意思是:婆罗门,这是我的第三次破壳而出、第三次出来、第三次作为圣者的诞生——也就是以诸漏灭尽智为嘴尖,啄破那遮蔽四圣谛的无明蛋壳;就像小鸡用嘴尖或爪尖啄破蛋壳后,从那个蛋壳里破壳而出、出来,重新生在鸡群中一样。巴利
Idāni evaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitaṃ taṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇādhigamaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassento ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇātiādimāha. Tattha vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇavijjā. Avijjāti catusaccapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso – ayaṃ kho me brāhmaṇa tatiyā abhinibbhidā ahosīti ettha ayaṃ kho mama brāhmaṇa āsavānaṃ khayañāṇamukhatuṇḍakena catusaccapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyā abhinibbhidā tatiyā nikkhanti tatiyā ariyajāti ahosi, kukkuṭacchāpakasseva mukhatuṇḍakena vā pādanakhasikhāya vā aṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tamhā aṇḍakosamhā abhinibbhidā nikkhanti kukkuṭanikāye paccājātīti.
说到这里,到底显示了什么呢?那位婆罗门如鸡雏〔破〕蛋壳……巴利
Ettāvatā kiṃ dassetīti? So hi brāhmaṇa kukkuṭacchāpako aṇḍakosaṃ
小鸡破壳而出后,只是出生一次而已;而我呢,是先破开那遮蔽过去世五蕴的无明卵壳,第一次以宿住随念智的明而出生;接着破开那遮蔽众生死亡与投生的无明卵壳,第二次以天眼智的明而出生;再破开那遮蔽四圣谛的无明卵壳,第三次以漏尽智的明而出生——就这样,我以三种明三次出生。而我的这个出生是圣洁的、极其清净的——他显示了这一点。这样显示的时候,他以宿住随念智显示了过去世的智,以天眼显示了现在和未来的智,以漏尽显示了一切世间与出世间的功德;就这样以三种明阐明了一切知者的一切功德之后,向那位婆罗门显示了自己圣洁出生中最尊最胜的地位。巴利
Padāletvā tato nikkhamanto sakimeva jāyati, ahaṃ pana pubbe-nivutthakkhandhapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ bhinditvā paṭhamaṃ tāva pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇavijjāya jāto, tato sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhipaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā dutiyaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇavijjāya jāto, puna catusaccapaṭicchādakaṃ avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padāletvā tatiyaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇavijjāya jāto; evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi tikkhattuṃ jāto. Sā ca me jāti ariyā suparisuddhāti idaṃ dassesi. Evaṃ dassento ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇanti evaṃ tīhi vijjāhi sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe pakāsetvā attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ brāhmaṇassa dassesīti.
关于随喜开示的论说巴利
Desanānumodanakathā
15 世尊出于对世间的悲悯,怜悯这位婆罗门;尽管这本该隐而不宣,世尊仍以宣说三明的法教,开示了自己圣洁出身的最尊最胜。当世尊这样说时,毗兰若婆罗门身心充满喜悦,了知世尊圣洁出身的最尊最胜之后,心想:“我竟然说这样一位一切世间最尊最胜、具足一切功德、一切知者‘不向他人行礼’——我真是无知啊!”他这样自责后,得出结论:“如今在世间,此人因圣洁出身、先出生之义而为最尊,因一切功德无与伦比之义而为最胜。”于是对世尊这样说:“乔达摩尊者是至为尊长者,乔达摩尊者是至为优胜者。”这样说了之后,又随喜世尊的法教,说道:“太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!”等等。巴利
15.Evaṃvutte verañjo brāhmaṇoti evaṃ bhagavatā lokānukampakena brāhmaṇaṃ anukampamānena vinigūhitabbepi attano ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāve vijjattayapakāsikāya dhammadesanāya vutte pītivipphāraparipuṇṇagattacitto verañjo brāhmaṇo taṃ bhagavato ariyāya jātiyā jeṭṭhaseṭṭhabhāvaṃ viditvā ‘‘īdisaṃ nāmāhaṃ sabbalokajeṭṭhaseṭṭhaṃ sabbaguṇasamannāgataṃ sabbaññuṃ ‘aññesaṃ abhivādanādikammaṃ na karotī’ti avacaṃ – ‘dhīratthu vatare aññāṇa’’’nti attānaṃ garahitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dāni loke ariyāya jātiyā purejātaṭṭhena jeṭṭho, sabbaguṇehi appaṭisamaṭṭhena seṭṭho’’ti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘jeṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo seṭṭho bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti. Evañca pana vatvā puna taṃ bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“abhikkanta”这个词出现在“耗尽”“美好”“美丽”“随喜”等意思中。比如“尊者,夜已经过去,初夜分已经过去,比丘僧团已经坐了很久”(增支部8.20)这类句子里,它表示“耗尽”的意思。又比如“这个人让我满意,在这四个人当中,他更优胜、更殊妙”(增支部4.100)这类句子里,它表示“美好”的意思。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanesu dissati. ‘‘Abhikkantā, bhante, ratti; nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.20) hi khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ me puggalo khamati, imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
“ 谁以神通和名声闪耀,来礼敬我的双足?
以极其殊胜的容色,照亮了一切方向。”巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. –
在《维曼那故事》857等处的“美丽”义项中,以及在“太殊胜了,尊者”等(《长部》1.250)的随喜用法中,这里同样是随喜的意思。因为是随喜,所以应当知道这里说的是“萨度萨度,乔达摩贤者”。巴利
Ādīsu (vi. va. 857) abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bhante’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.250) abbhanumodane. Idhāpi abbhanumodaneyeva. Yasmā ca abbhanumodane, tasmā ‘‘sādhu sādhu, bho gotamā’’ti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
“ 在害怕时、生气时、称赞时、匆忙时、好奇惊讶时,
在欢笑时、悲伤时、虔信时,智者应当用叠语。”巴利
‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti.
按照这个特征,应当知道:这里是从净信和赞叹两个方面,对这句话作了两次宣说。巴利
Iminā ca lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo.
或者,“殊胜”是指极可爱、极可意、极美妙。在这里,用一个“殊胜”来赞叹说法,用另一个来表达自己的净信。此处的意趣是:“太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者,这就是乔达摩尊者的说法;太殊胜了,正是由于乔达摩尊者的说法,我生起了净信。”又或者,这是以两种含义来赞叹乔达摩尊者的话语:乔达摩尊者的话语殊胜,因为能断除过失而殊胜,因为能证得功德而殊胜;同样,因为能生起信心而殊胜,因为能生起智慧而殊胜;因为有意义、有文采而殊胜;因为文句浅显、义理深奥而殊胜;因为悦耳、入心而殊胜;因为不自赞、不毁他而殊胜;因为悲心清凉、智慧明净而殊胜;因为初闻悦意、堪可审察而殊胜;因为听闻时得乐、审察时获益而殊胜。应当以这些方式如理结合起来理解。巴利
Atha vā abhikkantanti atiiṭṭhaṃ atimanāpaṃ atisundaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ekena abhikkantasaddena desanaṃ thometi, ekena attano pasādaṃ. Ayañhi ettha adhippāyo – ‘‘abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā, abhikkantaṃ yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanaṃ āgamma mama pasādo’’ti. Bhagavatoyeva vā vacanaṃ dve dve atthe sandhāya thometi – bhoto gotamassa vacanaṃ abhikkantaṃ dosanāsanato abhikkantaṃ guṇādhigamanato, tathā saddhājananato paññājananato, sātthato sabyañjanato, uttānapadato gambhīratthato, kaṇṇasukhato hadayaṅgamato, anattukkaṃsanato aparavambhanato, karuṇāsītalato paññāvadātato, apātharamaṇīyato vimaddakkhamato, suyyamānasukhato vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamādīhi yojetabbaṃ.
接着,他又用四个比喻来赞叹说法本身。其中,“倒扣着的”是指口朝下放着,或者面朝下。“把它翻正过来”是指让口朝上。“遮盖着的”是指被草、叶子等盖住。“把它打开”是指揭开。“迷路的人”是指迷失方向的人。“给他指路”是指拉着他的手说“这就是路”。“在黑暗中”是指黑半月第十四日的半夜,被密林、树丛和云层这四种黑暗所笼罩。以上是字面上的意思。下面则是意趣上的对应:就像有人把倒扣的东西翻正过来一样,世尊把我这个背离正法、安住在非正法里的人,从非正法中扶拔出来;就像有人把遮盖着的东西打开一样,世尊把自从迦叶佛的教法隐没以来,被邪见丛林所覆盖的教法重新揭开;就像有人给迷路的人指路一样,世尊为我这个走上邪道、歧途的人,指出了通往天界和解脱的道路;就像有人在黑暗中举着油灯一样,世尊为我这个沉没在愚痴黑暗中、看不见佛、法、僧三宝的人,举起了能破除那覆盖一切的愚痴黑暗的说法之灯。因为乔达摩尊者用这些方式为我开示,所以说“以种种方式开示了法”。巴利
Tato parampi catūhi upamāhi desanaṃyeva thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādipaṭicchāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā esa maggoti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharatta-ghanavanasaṇḍa-meghapaṭalehi caturaṅge tamasi. Ayaṃ tāva anuttānapadattho. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yathā koci nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyya, evaṃ saddhammavimukhaṃ asaddhamme patiṭṭhitaṃ maṃ asaddhammā vuṭṭhāpentena; yathā paṭicchannaṃ vivareyya, evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānā pabhuti micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchannaṃ sāsanaṃ vivarantena; yathā mūḷhassa maggaṃ ācikkheyya, evaṃ kummaggamicchāmaggappaṭipannassa me saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantena; yathā andhakāre telapajjotaṃ dhāreyya, evaṃ mohandhakāre nimuggassa me buddhādiratanattayarūpāni apassato tappaṭicchādakamohandhakāraviddhaṃsakadesanāpajjotaṃ dhārentena, mayhaṃ bhotā gotamena etehi pariyāyehi pakāsitattā anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsitoti.
关于净信相的论说巴利
Pasannākārakathā
他这样赞叹了说法之后,因为这次说法而对三宝生起清净信心,为了表达这份净信,便说出“esāhaṃ”等话。其中,“esāhaṃ”就是“eso ahaṃ”,意思是“我”。“我皈依乔达摩尊者”是说:我前往乔达摩尊者那里作为皈依处;乔达摩尊者是我的皈依、我的归宿,是救我脱离苦难的人,也是为我带来利益的人——怀着这样的心意,我前往乔达摩尊者那里,亲近他、侍奉他、陪伴他;也可以理解为:我这样了知、这样觉悟。因为那些有“前往”之义的词根,同时也含有“觉悟”之义,所以说“gacchāmi”也表达了“我了知、我觉悟”的意思。至于“以及法,以及比丘僧团”,这里的“法”,是指能让人在已证得的道上、已现证的灭尽中依教奉行,并且不堕入四恶趣的法;从根本含义来说,就是圣道和涅槃。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,在一切有为法中,圣八支道被称为它们中最上的。”(《增支部》4.34)详细内容应如此理解。而且,这里说的不只是圣道和涅槃,还包括与圣果一起的教法。在《恰塔玛那瓦卡维摩那》中也这样说:巴利
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto ‘‘esāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ saraṇanti gacchāmi; bhavaṃ me gotamo saraṇaṃ, parāyaṇaṃ, aghassa tātā, hitassa ca vidhātāti iminā adhippāyena bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ gacchāmi bhajāmi sevāmi payirupāsāmi , evaṃ vā jānāmi bujjhāmīti. Yesañhi dhātūnaṃ gatiattho, buddhipi tesaṃ attho; tasmā ‘‘gacchāmī’’ti imassa jānāmi bujjhāmīti ayampi attho vutto. Dhammañca bhikkhusaṅghañcāti ettha pana adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodhe yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne ca catūsu apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo; so atthato ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) vitthāro. Na kevalañca ariyamaggo ceva nibbānañca, api ca kho ariyaphalehi saddhiṃ pariyattidhammopi. Vuttampi hetaṃ chattamāṇavakavimāne –
“ 远离贪欲、无有动摇、没有忧悲,这是无为法、不违逆的。
这个甘甜、纯熟、善加分别的法,你应当为了皈依而亲近它。”巴利
‘‘Rāgavirāgamanejamasokaṃ, dhammamasaṅkhatamappaṭikūlaṃ; Madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattaṃ, dhammamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 887);
在这里,确实已经说了离贪之道,说了不动、无忧之果,说了无为法即涅槃。所谓不违逆、甘美、娴熟、善分别,就是指由三藏所分别的一切法蕴。由见与戒的集合而和合,称为僧伽;从实质上说,就是八种圣者的群体。这也正是在那座殿堂中所说的:巴利
Ettha hi rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalaṃ. Dhammamasaṅkhatanti nibbānaṃ. Appaṭikūlaṃ madhuramimaṃ paguṇaṃ suvibhattanti piṭakattayena vibhattā sabbadhammakkhandhāti. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātena saṃhatoti saṅgho, so atthato aṭṭhaariyapuggalasamūho. Vuttañhetaṃ tasmiṃyeva vimāne –
“ 在四种清净的男子对中,人们说布施有大果报。
这八位见法者,你应该皈依这个僧伽。”巴利
‘‘Yattha ca dinnamahapphalamāhu, catūsu sucīsu purisayugesu; Aṭṭha ca puggaladhammadasā te, saṅghamimaṃ saraṇatthamupehī’’ti. (vi. va. 888);
比丘们的团体,就是比丘僧伽。到这里,这位婆罗门已经宣说了三种皈依。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho bhikkhusaṅgho. Ettāvatā ca brāhmaṇo tīṇi saraṇagamanāni paṭivedesi.
关于皈依的讨论巴利
Saraṇagamanakathā
现在,为了在这三种皈依上具备善巧,要讲皈依、皈依的行为,以及谁在行皈依,巴利
Idāni tesveva tīsu saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo saraṇaṃ gacchati,
皈依的类别、皈依的果、杂染、破坏,这些是应当了知的分法。不过,如果在这里展开说明,就会让律藏的缘起部分变得过于繁重,所以这里没有加以解说。想要深入了解的人,应当从《破除迷执》——即中部义注中《怖畏经》的注释,或者从《吉祥光悦》——即长部义注中对皈依的解说里去获取。巴利
Saraṇagamanappabhedo, saraṇagamanaphalaṃ, saṃkileso, bhedoti ayaṃ vidhi vedi tabbo. So pana idha vuccamāno atibhāriyaṃ vinayanidānaṃ karotīti na vutto. Atthikehi pana papañcasūdaniyaṃ vā majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ bhayabheravasuttavaṇṇanato (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56) sumaṅgalavilāsiniyaṃ vā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.250) saraṇavaṇṇanato gahetabboti.
近事男身份的证悟之论巴利
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
“愿乔达摩尊者摄受我为近事男”,意思是:愿乔达摩尊者这样摄受我——“此人是近事男”。在这里,为了善巧了解近事男的相关规定,还应知道一些附带要点:谁是近事男?为什么称为近事男?他的戒是什么?他的活命方式是什么?什么是他的衰损?什么是他的成就?因为讲起来太繁重,这里不展开分析,有需要的人应当按《破除迷执》即《中部义注》里所说的方式去了解。在“从今日起”这句话里,“agga”这个词可以在“开始、末端、部分、最胜”这几种意思中出现。比如“从今日起,善哉守门人,我关闭尼干陀男女之门”等语中,它是“开始”的意思;“就以那个指尖触碰那个指尖”“蔗尖、竹尖”等语中,它是“末端”的意思;“酸味部分、甜味部分、苦味部分”“诸比丘,我允许按精舍部分或周房部分来分配”等语中,它是“部分”的意思;“诸比丘,凡无足、二足……如来被称为他们中最胜的”等语中,它是“最胜”的意思。但在这里,应当看作“开始”。所以“从今日起”在这里应理解为“以今日为开始”。“今日”说的就是“现今”。或者读作“ajjadagge”,其中的“d”是连音字,意思就是“以今日为开始”。“有命”就是与命同在,只要我的生命还在延续,就以此三皈依为皈依,没有别的导师,愿乔达摩尊者摄受我、了知我。即使有人用利刃砍下我的头,我也绝不会说“佛陀不是佛陀”,或者说“法不是法”,或者说“僧不是僧”。在这里应当知道,婆罗门再次说“有命而皈依”,是在表明他把自己交付出去。巴利
Upāsakaṃmaṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretūti maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretūti attho. Upāsakavidhikosallatthaṃ panettha ko upāsako, kasmā upāsakoti vuccati, kimassa sīlaṃ, ko ājīvo, kā vipatti, kā sampattīti idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Taṃ atibhāriyakaraṇato idha na vibhattaṃ, atthikehi pana papañcasūdaniyaṃ majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.56) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ajjataggeti ettha ayaṃ aggasaddo ādikoṭikoṭṭhāsaseṭṭhesu dissati. ‘‘Ajjatagge, samma dovārika, āvarāmi dvāraṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ nigaṇṭhīna’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.70) hi ādimhi dissati. ‘‘Teneva aṅgulaggena taṃ aṅgulaggaṃ parāmaseyya (kathā. 441), ucchaggaṃ veḷagga’’ntiādīsu koṭiyaṃ. ‘‘Ambilaggaṃ vā madhuraggaṃ vā tittakaggaṃ vā (saṃ. ni. 5.374) anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vihāraggena vā pariveṇaggena vā bhājetu’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 318) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.34) seṭṭhe. Idha panāyaṃ ādimhi daṭṭhabbo. Tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajjadagge icceva vā pāṭho, dakāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ, yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇagataṃ maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu jānātu, ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyyuṃ, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti. Ettha ca brāhmaṇo pāṇupetaṃ saraṇagatanti puna saraṇagamanaṃ vadanto attasanniyyātanaṃ pakāsetīti veditabbo.
他这样把自己奉献出去之后,想侍奉世尊和比丘僧团,就说:“请乔达摩尊者连同比丘僧团一起,接受我在毗兰若的雨安居。”这话说的是什么意思呢?就是说:“请乔达摩尊者认我为近事男,并接受我在毗兰若的雨安居;为了摄受我,请答应在毗兰若附近住三个月。”世尊以沉默接受了。也就是说,听了他的话之后,世尊没有动摇身业或语业,只是在内心安住于堪忍,以沉默接受;意思是说,为了摄受这位婆罗门,世尊以意接受了。巴利
Evaṃ attānaṃ niyyātetvā bhagavantaṃ saparisaṃ upaṭṭhātukāmo āha – ‘‘adhivāsetu ca me bhavaṃ gotamo verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – upāsakañca maṃ bhavaṃ gotamo dhāretu, adhivāsetu ca me verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ, tayo māse verañjaṃ upanissāya mama anuggahatthaṃ vāsaṃ sampaṭicchatūti. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti athassa vacanaṃ sutvā bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ cāretvā tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi; brāhmaṇassa anuggahatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti.
这时,毗兰若婆罗门知道世尊已经接受了,他心里想:“如果沙门乔达摩不接受我,就会用身体或语言拒绝。但他没有拒绝,而是在心里保持忍耐,所以他是用意念接受了我。”他因为善于观察各种表现,就这样知道世尊已经接受了,于是从自己的座位上起身,向四方恭敬地礼拜世尊,右绕三圈。虽然从刚来的时候起,他就因为不对出身高贵且年长的婆罗门行礼等而受到责备,但现在他已经了解了佛陀的功德,用身体、语言和意念再三礼拜仍不满足,于是十指甲相合、光辉闪耀地举起合掌,置于头顶,面向世尊倒退着离开,直到看不见世尊的地方,在那里顶礼之后才离去。巴利
Athakho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvāti atha verañjo brāhmaṇo sace me samaṇo gotamo nādhivāseyya, kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipeyya. Yasmā pana appaṭikkhipitvā abbhantare khantiṃ dhāresi, tasmā me manasāva adhivāsesīti evaṃ ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāya bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā, attano nisinnāsanato vuṭṭhāya catūsu disāsu bhagavantaṃ sakkaccaṃ vanditvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā āgatakālato pabhuti jātimahallakabrāhmaṇānaṃ abhivādanādīni na karotīti vigarahitvāpi idāni viññātabuddhaguṇo kāyena vācāya manasā ca anekakkhattuṃ vandantopi atittoyeva hutvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā yāva dassanavisayo tāva paṭimukhoyeva apakkamitvā dassanavisayaṃ vijahanaṭṭhāne vanditvā pakkāmi.
16 当时,毗兰若正闹饥荒。具体来说,就是在毗兰若婆罗门请求世尊在毗兰若附近入雨安居的那段时间,毗兰若发生了饥荒。“饥荒”的意思是很难讨到食物。不过,这种食物难得的情况,通常发生在人们对三宝没有信心、没有净信的地方,即使是在丰收时节、谷物价格极为低廉的时候也会出现。但在毗兰若并不是这样,而是因为收成不好、被饥饿所困才发生的。所以,为了说明这个意思,就说了“生活困难”等话。其中,“生活困难”是指以两种方式维持生计。所谓“生活”,就是生存的方式,分为两种:心的生存、心的渴求。“我们在这里乞食,能不能得到一点什么?还是得不到?”
“我们能不能活下去?还是活不下去?”这就是这里要表达的意思。巴利
16.Tena kho pana samayena verañjā dubbhikkhā hotīti yasmiṃ samaye verañjena brāhmaṇena bhagavā verañjaṃ upanissāya vassāvāsaṃ yācito , tena samayena verañjā dubbhikkhā hoti. Dubbhikkhāti dullabhabhikkhā; sā pana dullabhabhikkhatā yattha manussā assaddhā honti appasannā, tattha susassakālepi atisamagghepi pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇe hoti. Verañjāyaṃ pana yasmā na tathā ahosi, apica kho dusassatāya chātakadosena ahosi tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento dvīhitikātiādimāha. Tattha dvīhitikāti dvidhā pavattaīhitikā. Īhitaṃ nāma iriyā dvidhā pavattā – cittairiyā, cittaīhā. ‘‘Ettha lacchāma nu kho kiñci bhikkhamānā na lacchāmā’’ti, ‘‘jīvituṃ vā sakkhissāma nu kho no’’ti ayamettha adhippāyo.
或者,“dvīhitikā”的意思是难以维生。īhita、īhā、iriyana、pavattana、jīvita这些词意思相同。所以,在这里是以痛苦来维持生计,因此叫“dvīhitikā”,这就是这里这个词的含义。“setaṭṭhikā”的意思是那里有白色的骨头,所以叫“setaṭṭhikā”。意思是说,那些乞讨了一整天却什么也没得到就死去的可怜人,他们的骨头散落在各处,颜色像蛇菇一样。也有写成“setaṭṭikā”的读法。它的意思是:那里有白色的病,所以叫“setaṭṭikā”。“aṭṭi”指的是病苦、疾病。而在那里,庄稼结穗的时候,被白病侵害,汁液断绝、没能结成米粒,长出来的是惨白的稻穗,或者大麦穗、小麦穗,因此叫“setaṭṭikā”。巴利
Atha vā dvīhitikāti dujjīvikā, īhitaṃ īhā iriyanaṃ pavattanaṃ jīvitantiādīni padāni ekatthāni. Tasmā dukkhena īhitaṃ ettha pavattatīti dvīhitikāti ayamettha padattho. Setaṭṭhikāti setakāni aṭṭhīni etthāti setaṭṭhikā. Divasampi yācitvā kiñci aladdhā matānaṃ kapaṇamanussānaṃ ahicchattakavaṇṇehi aṭṭhīhi tatra tatra parikiṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Setaṭṭikātipi pāṭho. Tassattho – setā aṭṭi etthāti setaṭṭikā. Aṭṭīti āturatā byādhi rogo. Tattha ca sassānaṃ gabbhaggahaṇakāle setakarogena upahatameva pacchinnakhīraṃ aggahitataṇḍulaṃ paṇḍarapaṇḍaraṃ sālisīsaṃ vā yavagodhūmasīsaṃ vā nikkhamati, tasmā ‘‘setaṭṭikā’’ti vuccati.
在播种时节,即使精心准备,播种的谷物在那里也只长出签子,所以叫“靠签子维生”;或者,在那里靠签子维持生活,所以叫“靠签子维生”。这话是什么意思呢?据说,在那里,买谷物的人来到卖谷物的人那里时,强壮的人仗势压过弱小的人,买了谷物就走。弱小的人买不到,就大声吵嚷。卖谷物的人想“我们要照顾到所有人”,就让称量谷物的人坐在谷仓里,又让验货估价的人坐在一旁。需要谷物的人就到验货估价的人那里去。他按来的先后顺序取了凭证,写下签子:“应当给某某人这么多。”然后交给他们。他们拿着签子到称量谷物的人那里,按发签的顺序领取谷物。就这样,在那里靠签子维持生活,所以叫“靠签子维生”。巴利
Vappakāle suṭṭhu abhisaṅkharitvāpi vuttasassaṃ tattha salākā eva sampajjatīti salākāvuttā; salākāya vā tattha jīvitaṃ pavattentīti salākāvuttā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tattha kira dhaññavikkayakānaṃ santikaṃ kayakesu gatesu dubbalamanusse abhibhavitvā balavamanussāva dhaññaṃ kiṇitvā gacchanti. Dubbalamanussā alabhamānā mahāsaddaṃ karonti. Dhaññavikkayakā ‘‘sabbesaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmā’’ti dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāne dhaññamāpakaṃ nisīdāpetvā ekapasse vaṇṇajjhakkhaṃ nisīdāpesuṃ. Dhaññatthikā vaṇṇajjhakkhassa santikaṃ gacchanti. So āgatapaṭipāṭiyā mūlaṃ gahetvā ‘‘itthannāmassa ettakaṃ dātabba’’nti salākaṃ likhitvā deti, te taṃ gahetvā dhaññamāpakassa santikaṃ gantvā dinnapaṭipāṭiyā dhaññaṃ gaṇhanti. Evaṃ salākāya tattha jīvitaṃ pavattentīti salākāvuttā.
靠拾穗来维持生活并不容易。这里说的是:靠拾穗所得来维持生活并不容易。拿着钵,像圣者们那样拾穗、行乞食,靠这样的拾穗来维持生活并不容易——这就是这段话的意思。据说,那时候在那个地方,即使走七八个村庄乞食,连维持一天生活的食物也得不到。巴利
Na sukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetunti paggahena yo uñcho, tena yāpetuṃ na sukarā. Pattaṃ gahetvā yaṃ ariyā uñchaṃ karonti, bhikkhācariyaṃ caranti, tena uñchena yāpetuṃ na sukarāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadā kira tattha sattaṭṭhagāme piṇḍāya caritvā ekadivasampi yāpanamattaṃ na labhanti.
当时,那些从北方来的马商……世尊听到了捣臼的声音。这里所说的“当时”,是指世尊依止毗兰若城、进入雨安居的那段时间。那些马商住在北方,或是从北方而来,因为来自北方,就得了“北方马商”这个称呼。他们在北方产马之地取了五百匹马,想赚取两倍三倍的利润,便赶着马穿行各地,最后把这五百匹马当作商品贩卖,带到了毗兰若城,在那里进入雨安居。为什么呢?因为那个地方雨季四个月里根本没法赶路。他们到来时,就在城外不会被水淹没的地方,为自己建造住处,为马建造马厩,并用篱笆围了起来。他们居住的那些地方,就被称为“马圈”。因此说:“在他们那些马圈里,为比丘们准备了一钵一钵的粗碾麦。”所谓“一钵一钵的粗碾麦”,就是每一位比丘一钵量的粗碾麦。所谓“钵”的量,是一纳利之量,足够一个男子维持生活。这也是有说的:“一钵饭不足以供两人。”所谓“粗碾麦”,是指去掉糠壳、蒸煮后取来的大麦米。如果还带着糠壳,就会被虫蛀,也不能耐久行路。因此那些马商为了能耐久行路,就取了大麦米上路,心想:“凡是马可食的草难以获得的地方,就拿这大麦米作马食。”巴利
Tena kho pana samayena uttarāpathakā assavāṇijā…pe… assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti – tenāti yasmiṃ samaye bhagavā verañjaṃ upanissāya vassāvāsaṃ upagato tena samayena. Uttarāpathavāsikā uttarāpathato vā āgatattā evaṃ laddhavohārā assavāṇijā uttarāpathe assānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhāne pañca assasatāni gahetvā diguṇaṃ tiguṇaṃ lābhaṃ patthayamānā desantaraṃ gacchantā tehi attano vikkāyikabhaṇḍabhūtehi pañcamattehi assasatehi verañjaṃ vassāvāsaṃ upagatā honti. Kasmā? Na hi sakkā tasmiṃ dese vassike cattāro māse addhānaṃ paṭipajjituṃ. Upagacchantā ca bahinagare udakena anajjhottharaṇīye ṭhāne attano ca vāsāgārāni assānañca mandiraṃ kārāpetvā vatiyā parikkhipiṃsu. Tāni tesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānāni ‘‘assamaṇḍalikāyo’’ti paññāyiṃsu. Tenāha – ‘‘tehi assamaṇḍalikāsu bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti. Patthapatthapulakanti ekamekassa bhikkhuno patthapatthapamāṇaṃ pulakaṃ. Pattho nāma nāḷimattaṃ hoti, ekassa purisassa alaṃ yāpanāya. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘patthodano nālamayaṃ duvinna’’nti (jā. 2.21.192). Pulakaṃ nāma nitthusaṃ katvā ussedetvā gahitayavataṇḍulā vuccanti. Yadi hi sathusā honti, pāṇakā vijjhanti, addhānakkhamā na honti. Tasmā te vāṇijā addhānakkhamaṃ katvā yavataṇḍulamādāya addhānaṃ paṭipajjanti ‘‘yattha assānaṃ khādanīyaṃ tiṇaṃ dullabhaṃ bhavissati, tatthetaṃ assabhattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti.
为什么他们要为那些比丘准备这些呢?回答说:他们可不像南方人那样没有信心、缺乏净信,而是有信心、有净信,皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧。他们上午因为某些事情进城时,在两三天里看到七八位比丘,穿着整齐,威仪具足,走遍全城乞食,却什么也得不到。看到之后,他们心里想:“这些尊者是依止这座城入雨安居的,现在正闹饥荒,他们什么都得不到,非常疲惫。我们是外来人,没办法每天为他们准备粥和饭。但我们的马早晚各得一次饲料。不如我们从每匹马的早餐饲料里,分出一钵盂粗碾麦给每位比丘。这样尊者们就不会太累,马也能维持下去。”于是他们走到比丘们那里,说明这件事,请求说:“尊者,请接受这一钵盂粗碾麦,随便怎么处理之后吃吧。”于是每天准备一钵盂粗碾麦。因此说:“他们在马圈里为比丘们准备了每人一钵盂的粗碾麦。”巴利
Kasmā pana tehi taṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paññattanti? Vuccate – ‘‘na hi te dakkhiṇāpathamanussā viya assaddhā appasannā, te pana saddhā pasannā buddhamāmakā, dhammamāmakā, saṅghamāmakā; te pubbaṇhasamayaṃ kenacideva karaṇīyena nagaraṃ pavisantā dve tayo divase addasaṃsu sattaṭṭha bhikkhū sunivatthe supārute iriyāpathasampanne sakalampi nagaraṃ piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci alabhamāne. Disvāna nesaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘ayyā imaṃ nagaraṃ upanissāya vassaṃ upagatā; chātakañca vattati, na ca kiñci labhanti, ativiya kilamanti. Mayañcamha āgantukā, na sakkoma nesaṃ devasikaṃ yāguñca bhattañca paṭiyādetuṃ. Amhākaṃ pana assā sāyañca pāto ca dvikkhattuṃ bhattaṃ labhanti. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ ekamekassa assassa pātarāsabhattato ekamekassa bhikkhuno patthapatthapulakaṃ dadeyyāma. Evaṃ ayyā ca na kilamissanti , assā ca yāpessantī’’ti. Te bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ gantvā etamatthaṃ ārocetvā ‘‘bhante, tumhe patthapatthapulakaṃ paṭiggahetvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā katvā paribhuñjathā’’ti yācitvā devasikaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññapesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tehi assamaṇḍalikāsu bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ paññattaṃ hotī’’ti.
所谓“施设”,是以常施食的简要方式而确立的。现在,在“比丘们于午前时分,著下衣……”等句中,“午前时分”是指白天的前段时分,即午前时分的意思。或者说,午前的时分称为午前时分,即指午前的一个时刻。如此,在持续关系中,此处获得了业格。“著下衣”即穿著、披覆,这应理解为更换在寺内的住处衣,因为他们在此之前并非未穿著。“持钵与衣”即用手持钵、以身持衣,取来并妥善披覆,也就是“持用”的意思。因为无论以何种方式拿取,都称为“持取”,例如“持取后便离去”(《长部》1.21)。“得不到团食”,是指即使走遍整个毗兰若城,且不说团食,连一句“请到别处去”的话也得不到。巴利
Paññattanti niccabhattasaṅkhepena ṭhapitaṃ. Idāni bhikkhū pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvātiādīsu pubbaṇhasamayanti divasassa pubbabhāgasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhasamayeti attho. Pubbaṇhe vā samayaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ, pubbaṇhe ekaṃ khaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ labbhati. Nivāsetvāti paridahitvā, vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi te tato pubbe anivatthā ahesuṃ. Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattaṃ hatthehi cīvaraṃ kāyena ādiyitvā sampaṭicchādetvā, dhāretvāti attho. Yena vā tena vā hi pakārena gaṇhantā ādāyaicceva vuccanti, yathā ‘‘samādāyeva pakkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.21). Piṇḍaṃ alabhamānāti sakalampi verañjaṃ caritvā tiṭṭhatu piṇḍo, antamaso ‘‘aticchathā’’ti vācampi alabhamānā.
把一捧一捧的粗谷带回寺院,意思是:在走过的每一个地方,把得到的一捧一捧粗谷一一收起来,带回寺院。在臼里捣了又捣再吃,意思是:长老们没有净人,能替他们把那些粗谷拿去煮粥或做饭。自己动手煮饭,既不符合沙门的身份,也不被允许。他们想:这样我们就能少事少累,也不用自己煮饭了。于是八个人或十个人聚在一起,在臼里捣了又捣,各自把自己那一份用水浸湿后吃掉。这样吃完以后,他们少操心,专心修行沙门之法。那些马商则把粗谷供养给世尊,还供养了配粗谷用的酥、蜜和糖。阿难尊者把这些取来,在石头上研磨。有福德的智者所做的一切,总是让人欢喜。然后他把磨好的粗谷用酥等好好调和,端给世尊。这时天神们又投进了天界的滋味。世尊就吃了。吃完以后,以果定度过时光。从那时起,世尊就不再外出乞食了。巴利
Patthapatthapulakaṃ ārāmaṃ āharitvāti gatagataṭṭhāne laddhaṃ ekamekaṃ patthapatthapulakaṃ gahetvā ārāmaṃ netvā. Udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā paribhuñjantīti therānaṃ koci kappiyakārako natthi, yo nesaṃ taṃ gahetvā yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā paceyya. Sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti na ca vaṭṭati. Te evaṃ no sallahukavuttitā ca bhavissati, sāmapākaparimocanañcāti aṭṭha aṭṭha janā vā dasa dasa janā vā ekato hutvā udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā sakaṃ sakaṃ paṭivīsaṃ udakena temetvā paribhuñjanti. Evaṃ paribhuñjitvā appossukkā samaṇadhammaṃ karonti . Bhagavato pana te assavāṇijā patthapulakañca denti, tadupiyañca sappimadhusakkaraṃ. Taṃ āyasmā ānando āharitvā silāyaṃ pisati. Puññavatā paṇḍitapurisena kataṃ manāpameva hoti. Atha naṃ pisitvā sappiādīhi sammā yojetvā bhagavato upanāmesi. Athettha devatā dibbojaṃ pakkhipanti. Taṃ bhagavā paribhuñjati. Paribhuñjitvā phalasamāpattiyā kālaṃ atināmeti. Na tato paṭṭhāya piṇḍāya carati.
那么,当时阿难长老是世尊的侍者吗?是的,但他还没有得到侍者这个位置。因为世尊在最初成道后的二十年里,并没有固定的常随侍者。有时是那嘎萨玛拉长老侍奉世尊,有时是那吉达长老,有时是美吉亚长老,有时是伍巴瓦那长老,有时是娑伽陀长老,有时是离车族之子苏那卡达。他们按自己的意愿来侍奉,想走的时候就离开。这些人在侍奉的时候,阿难长老落得清闲;等他们走了以后,他就自己承担起日常事务。世尊这边,这位亲族中最殊胜的人虽然还没有得到侍者的位置,但在这种情形下,正是他最合适,于是世尊也就默许了。因此才说:阿难长老在石头上把粗谷磨碎后,奉给世尊,世尊就吃了。巴利
Kiṃ panānandatthero tadā bhagavato upaṭṭhāko hotīti? Hoti, no ca kho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhā. Bhagavato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthi. Kadāci nāgasamālatthero bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhāsi, kadāci nāgitatthero, kadāci meghiyatthero, kadāci upavāṇatthero, kadāci sāgatatthero, kadāci sunakkhatto licchaviputto. Te attano ruciyā upaṭṭhahitvā yadā icchanti tadā pakkamanti. Ānandatthero tesu tesu upaṭṭhahantesu appossukko hoti, pakkantesu sayameva vattapaṭipattiṃ karoti. Bhagavāpi kiñcāpi me ñātiseṭṭho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ na tāva labhati, atha kho evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti adhivāsesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āyasmā panānando patthapulakaṃ silāyaṃ pisitvā bhagavato upanāmesi, taṃ bhagavā paribhuñjatī’’ti.
难道人们在大饥荒的时候,不是会生起极大的干劲去修福德行善,甚至觉得自己不吃也要布施给比丘们吗?那他们当时为什么连一勺饭都不肯供养呢?还有,那位毘兰若婆罗门那么热心地请求世尊留下来入雨安居,他为什么连世尊在不在都搞不清楚呢?回答说:这是因为魔罗的搅乱。毘兰若婆罗门刚从世尊那里离开,魔罗就把整座城以及周围大约一由旬的范围——也就是能在午前乞食后赶回来的那片地方——全都搅乱、迷惑了,让所有人都失去了觉察力,然后才离开。所以,没有一个人觉得该做点什么,哪怕只是表示一下恭敬。巴利
Nanu ca manussā dubbhikkhakāle ativiya ussāhajātā puññāni karonti, attanā abhuñjitvāpi bhikkhūnaṃ dātabbaṃ maññanti. Te tadā kasmā kaṭacchubhikkhampi na adaṃsu? Ayañca verañjo brāhmaṇo mahatā ussāhena bhagavantaṃ vassāvāsaṃ yāci, so kasmā bhagavato atthibhāvampi na jānātīti? Vuccate – mārāvaṭṭanāya. Verañjañhi brāhmaṇaṃ bhagavato santikā pakkantamattameva sakalañca nagaraṃ samantā ca yojanamattaṃ yattha sakkā purebhattaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgantuṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ māro āvaṭṭetvā mohetvā sabbesaṃ asallakkhaṇabhāvaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Tasmā na koci antamaso sāmīcikammampi kattabbaṃ maññittha.
那么,世尊是不是因为不知道魔罗的扰乱,才在那里入雨安居的呢?不是不知道。那为什么不去瞻波、舍卫城、王舍城等地方中的某一处入雨安居呢?且不说瞻波、舍卫城、王舍城,就算世尊那一年去北俱卢洲或者三十三天城入雨安居,魔罗也一样会去扰乱那里。据说那一年,魔罗的内心被极大的嗔恨紧紧缠住。而世尊在这里看到了一个特别的理由:“马商们会护持比丘们。”所以世尊就在毘兰若入了雨安居。巴利
Kiṃ pana bhagavāpi mārāvaṭṭanaṃ ajānitvāva tattha vassaṃ upagatoti? No ajānitvā. Atha kasmā campā-sāvatthi-rājagahādīnaṃ aññatarasmiṃ na upagatoti? Tiṭṭhantu campā-sāvatthi-rājagahādīni, sacepi bhagavā tasmiṃ saṃvacchare uttarakuruṃ vā tidasapuraṃ vā gantvā vassaṃ upagaccheyya, tampi māro āvaṭṭeyya. So kira taṃ saṃvaccharaṃ ativiya āghātena pariyuṭṭhitacitto ahosi. Idha pana bhagavā imaṃ atirekakāraṇaṃ addasa – ‘‘assavāṇijā bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissantī’’ti. Tasmā verañjāyameva vassaṃ upagacchi.
魔罗难道就不能扰乱那些商人吗?不能,他确实不能,只是他们是在扰乱结束之后才来的。既然魔罗已经折返,为什么不再扰乱呢?因为他没有那个胆量。他确实不敢去障碍如来所接受的食物、常恒的布施、已经确立的供养。因为有四种东西,任何人都无法障碍。是哪四种呢?如来所接受的食物、常恒的布施、已经确立的供养、已经施舍的四种资具,这四种东西任何人都无法障碍。诸佛的寿命,任何人都无法障碍。八十种随形好和身光,任何人都无法障碍。就连日月、天神、梵天神的光明,一旦触及如来随形好和身光的范围,也会失去威力。诸佛的一切知智,任何人都无法障碍。对这四种东西,任何人都无法障碍。因此应当知道,魔罗没能造成障碍,世尊和声闻僧团当时就享用了那些食物。巴利
Kiṃ pana māro vāṇijake āvaṭṭetuṃ na sakkotīti? No na sakkoti, te pana āvaṭṭitapariyosāne āgamiṃsu. Paṭinivattitvā kasmā na āvaṭṭetīti? Avisahatāya. Na hi so tathāgatassa abhihaṭabhikkhāya nibaddhadānassa appitavattassa antarāyaṃ kātuṃ visahati. Catunnañhi na sakkā antarāyo kātuṃ. Katamesaṃ catunnaṃ? Tathāgatassa abhihaṭabhikkhāsaṅkhepena vā nibaddhadānassa appitavattasaṅkhepena vā pariccattānaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Buddhānaṃ jīvitassa na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Asītiyā anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya vā na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Candimasūriyadevabrahmānampi hi pabhā tathāgatassa anubyañjanabyāmappabhāppadesaṃ patvā vihatānubhāvā honti. Buddhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassa na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātunti imesaṃ catunnaṃ na sakkā kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ. Tasmā mārena akatantarāyaṃ bhikkhaṃ bhagavā sasāvakasaṅgho tadā paribhuñjatīti veditabbo.
他这样受用食物时,有一天,世尊听到了杵臼的声音——世尊听见比丘们捣碎米时,杵棒互相碰撞发出的杵臼声。后面那句“如来虽知亦……”等等,是为了说明接下来世尊问“阿难,那杵臼声究竟是什么”这个问题背后的解答用意。这里简要解释一下:所谓如来,即使已经知道,如果有发问的理由,就会发问;如果没有发问的理由,即使知道也不会问。但因为诸佛绝不存在“不知道”这回事,所以经文没有说“虽不知亦”。他们是了知时机才问的——如果那时是发问的适当时机,就这样了知时机而问;如果不是,也同样了知时机而不问。这样发问时,如来只问有意义、有道理的问题,只问与义相应、与因相应的问题,不问没有意义的问题。为什么?因为如来对没有意义的事已经“断桥”。所谓桥,就是道路,意思是通过道把那种话彻底斩断、根除。巴利
Evaṃ paribhuñjanto ca ekadivasaṃ assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti bhagavā patthapatthapulakaṃ koṭṭentānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ musalasaṅghaṭṭajanitaṃ udukkhalasaddaṃ suṇi. Tato paraṃ jānantāpi tathāgatāti evamādi yaṃ parato ‘‘kinnu kho so, ānanda, udukkhalasaddo’’ti pucchi, tassa parihāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – tathāgatā nāma jānantāpi sace tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ hoti, pucchanti. Sace pana tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ natthi, jānantāpi na pucchanti. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ajānantāpīti na vuttaṃ. Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantīti sace tassā pucchāya so kālo hoti, evaṃ taṃ kālaṃ viditvā pucchanti; sace na hoti , evampi kālaṃ viditvāva na pucchanti. Evaṃ pucchantāpi ca atthasaṃhitaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, yaṃ atthanissitaṃ kāraṇanissitaṃ, tadeva pucchanti, no anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā anatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Setu vuccati maggo, maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto, samucchedoti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在来说“与义相应”这句话:在这里,如来所问的是立足于义的话,为了说明这一点,就说了“以两种理由”等话。其中,“理由”就是原因。“我们将说法”,意思是我们要讲与事由因缘相应的经,或者讲与过去行为因缘相应的本生。“或者为弟子制定学处”,意思是我们要借着这个问题把违犯显露出来,然后制定或重或轻的学处,确立教令。巴利
Idāni atthasaṃhitanti ettha yaṃ atthasannissitaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’ti ādimāha. Tattha ākārehīti kāraṇehi. Dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti aṭṭhuppattiyuttaṃ suttaṃ vā pubbacaritakāraṇayuttaṃ jātakaṃ vā kathayissāma. Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃpaññapessāmāti sāvakānaṃ vā tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāma āṇaṃ ṭhapessāmāti.
世尊……告知此事这一句里,没有什么需要多说的。因为这里说的正是告知先前已经讲过的内容:比丘们得到一把把的碎米、身体轻安、免于自己煮食。所谓“告知此事”,指的就是这个。而“萨度,萨度,阿难”这句,是世尊为了称赞阿难尊者才说的。世尊给了赞叹之后,从两种方式中取一种来说法,说道:“阿难,你们这些善士已经战胜了;后来的世代将会看不起米饭和肉食。”这里的意思是:阿难,你们这些善士,在这样闹饥荒、乞食难得的时候,靠这种简朴的生活方式,靠这种克己,已经战胜了。战胜了什么?战胜了饥荒,战胜了贪欲,战胜了贪求的行为。怎么战胜的呢?“这毗兰若闹饥荒,但四周邻近的村庄和市镇却果实累累、稻穗沉甸甸地低垂,食物丰足、乞食容易。尽管如此,世尊却偏偏留在这里,使我们受制。”即使是一位比丘,也没有这样的想法或烦恼。这样,饥荒就被战胜、被克服、被置于自己的掌控之下了。巴利
Atha kho bhagavā…pe… etamatthaṃ ārocesīti ettha natthi kiñci vattabbaṃ. Pubbe vuttameva hi bhikkhūnaṃ patthapatthapulakapaṭilābhaṃ sallahukavuttitaṃ sāmapākaparimocanañca ārocento etamatthaṃ ārocesīti vuccati. ‘‘Sādhusādhu, ānandā’’ti idaṃ pana bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sampahaṃsento āha. Sādhukāraṃ pana datvā dvīsu ākāresu ekaṃ gahetvā dhammaṃ desento āha – ‘‘tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi vijitaṃ, pacchimā janatā sālimaṃsodanaṃ atimaññissatī’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi evaṃ dubbhikkhe dullabhapiṇḍe imāya sallahukavuttitāya iminā ca sallekhena vijitaṃ. Kiṃ vijitanti? Dubbhikkhaṃ vijitaṃ, lobho vijito, icchācāro vijito. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, samantato pana anantarā gāmanigamā phalabhāranamitasassā subhikkhā sulabhapiṇḍā. Evaṃ santepi bhagavā idheva amhe niggaṇhitvā vasatī’’ti ekabhikkhussapi cintā vā vighāto vā natthi. Evaṃ tāva dubbhikkhaṃ vijitaṃ abhibhūtaṃ attano vase vattitaṃ.
贪是怎样被战胜的?当时毗兰若正闹饥荒,可是四周不远处的村落城镇,庄稼被果实压弯了穗头,食物丰足,乞食容易。于是有人想:“走吧,我们去那里受用。”然而,没有一位比丘因为贪的力量而中断一夜的修行,也没有人想“我们去那里进入雨季安居”而中断安居。贪就是这样被战胜的。巴利
Kathaṃ lobho vijito? ‘‘Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, samantato pana anantarā gāmanigamā phalabhāranamitasassā subhikkhā sulabhapiṇḍā . Handa mayaṃ tattha gantvā paribhuñjissāmā’’ti lobhavasena ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā ‘‘pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmā’’ti vassacchedo vā na kato. Evaṃ lobho vijito.
怎样才是“欲行被战胜”?当时毗兰若正闹饥荒,这些人对我们住上两三个月也毫不在意。我们不如做一笔功德交易,向人们互相宣扬:“某位比丘是初禅的证得者……某位比丘证得六神通”,先养好肚子,然后再来确立戒行。然而,这样的欲求,连一位比丘也没有生起。这样,欲行就被战胜、被制伏,被置于自己的掌控之下了。巴利
Kathaṃ icchācāro vijito? Ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, ime ca manussā amhe dve tayo māse vasantepi na kismiñci maññanti. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ guṇavāṇijjaṃ katvā ‘‘asuko bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī…pe… asuko chaḷabhiññoti evaṃ manussānaṃ aññamaññaṃ pakāsetvā kucchiṃ paṭijaggitvā pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti ekabhikkhunāpi evarūpā icchā na uppāditā. Evaṃ icchācāro vijito abhibhūto attano vase vattitoti.
未来那些后辈人坐在精舍里,毫不费力就能得到食物,却还是会这样轻视米饭和肉食:“这是什么?饭太硬、太烂,不够咸、太咸,不够酸、太酸,这有什么意思?”他们会以这种方式轻视、鄙视这些食物。再说,一个地方并非任何时候都闹饥荒。有时闹饥荒,有时食物丰足。当食物丰足的时候,那些对你们这些善人的修行生起信心的人,会认为应当以粥、嚼食等种种米饭制品和肉食来供养比丘们。而这份因你们而生的恭敬,那些被称为你们同梵行者的后辈人,坐在你们中间一边享用,一边却轻视它,并因此生起慢心和轻蔑心。他们会怎么说呢?“为什么煮这么多?你们自己没有钵器吗?把自己那份盛进去放着不就行了。”巴利
Anāgate pana pacchimā janatā vihāre nisinnā appakasireneva labhitvāpi ‘‘kiṃ idaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ atikilinnaṃ aloṇaṃ atiloṇaṃ anambilaṃ accambilaṃ, ko iminā attho’’ti ādinā nayena sālimaṃsodanaṃ atimaññissati, oññātaṃ avaññātaṃ karissati. Atha vā janapado nāma na sabbakālaṃ dubbhikkho hoti. Ekadā dubbhikkho hoti, ekadā subhikkho hoti. Svāyaṃ yadā subhikkho bhavissati, tadā tumhākaṃ sappurisānaṃ imāya paṭipattiyā pasannā manussā bhikkhūnaṃ yāgukhajjakādippabhedena anekappakāraṃ sālivikatiṃ maṃsodanañca dātabbaṃ maññissanti. Taṃ tumhe nissāya uppannaṃ sakkāraṃ tumhākaṃ sabrahmacārīsaṅkhātā pacchimā janatā tumhākaṃ antare nisīditvā anubhavamānāva atimaññissati, tappaccayaṃ mānañca omānañca karissati. Kathaṃ? Kasmā ettakaṃ pakkaṃ, kiṃ tumhākaṃ bhājanāni natthi, yattha attano santakaṃ pakkhipitvā ṭhapeyyāthāti.
大目犍连的狮子吼经巴利
Mahāmoggallānassasīhanādakathā
17 这时,具寿大目犍连……在这些话里,“具寿”是一种亲昵的称呼,也是表示尊重、恭敬和景仰的说法。“大目犍连”的意思是:他因为功德广大而称为“大”,又因为族姓而称为“目犍连”,所以叫“大目犍连”。“如此说”就是说了这番话。这里引出接下来要说的“现在,尊者……”等话。为什么这样说呢?据说长老出家后第七天,就达到了声闻巴拉密智的顶点,也被导师以具大神通力而列为第一。他依靠自己的大神通力,心里想:“这毗兰若正闹饥荒,比丘们疲惫不堪,我何不翻转大地,用地衣之味来供养比丘们呢?”接着他又想:“可是,我若住在世尊身边,不向世尊请求就这么做,那对我不合适,那会像是要和世尊争胜一样。”因此,他怀着请求之意,来到世尊面前,如此说道。巴利
17.Atha kho āyasmā mahāmoggallānotiādīsu āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ, garugāravasappatissādhivacanametaṃ. Mahāmoggallānoti mahā ca so guṇamahantatāya moggallāno ca gottenāti mahāmoggallāno. Etadavocāti etaṃ avoca. Idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘etarahi bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ dasseti. Kasmā avoca? Thero kira pabbajitvā sattame divase sāvakapāramiñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto, satthārāpi mahiddhikatāya etadagge ṭhapito. So taṃ attano mahiddhikataṃ nissāya cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ verañjā dubbhikkhā, bhikkhū ca kilamanti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ pathaviṃ parivattetvā bhikkhū pappaṭakojaṃ bhojeyya’’nti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘sace panāhaṃ bhagavato santike viharanto bhagavantaṃ ayācitvā evaṃ kareyyaṃ, na metaṃ assa patirūpaṃ; yugaggāho viya bhagavatā saddhiṃ kato bhaveyyā’’ti. Tasmā yācitukāmo āgantvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca.
所谓“下层具足”,是说大地的下层据说有地壳、地髓、地膜,这句话就是针对这个说的。这里“具足”是甘美、味道好的意思。就像“那里的树果实具足、果实丰盛”这句话里,意思是果实甘美;同样,这里“具足”也应该理解为甘美、味道好。“譬如无巢的小蜜”这句,是为了用譬喻说明它的甘美程度而说的。“小蜜”指小蜜蜂酿的蜜。“无巢”指没有蜂、没有蜂巢块,纯净无杂。据说这种蜜在一切蜜中最上、最胜、味道最好、最有滋养,因此说“其味道譬如无巢的小蜜”。巴利
Heṭṭhimatalaṃ sampannanti pathaviyā kira heṭṭhimatale pathavimaṇḍo pathavojo pathavi-pappaṭako atthi, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha sampannanti madhuraṃ, sādurasanti attho. Yatheva hi ‘‘tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.48) ettha madhuraphaloti attho; evamidhāpi sampannanti madhuraṃ sādurasanti veditabbaṃ. Seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ anīḷakanti idaṃ panassa madhuratāya opammanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Khuddamadhunti khuddakamakkhikāhi katamadhu. Anīḷakanti nimmakkhikaṃ nimmakkhikaṇḍakaṃ parisuddhaṃ. Etaṃ kira madhu sabbamadhūhi aggañca seṭṭhañca surasañca ojavantañca. Tenāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi khuddamadhuṃ anīḷakaṃ evamassāda’’nti.
“萨度,尊者!”就是“好啊,尊者”的意思。这里的“萨度”是恳请用语。长老是为了请求翻转大地,才这样对世尊说的。“翻转”就是让它仰过来,把下层翻到上面。为什么要这样?因为这样做之后,比丘们就能轻松自在地享用那层地膜和地髓形成的地壳。于是,世尊虽然并不想答应,但为了让长老发出狮子吼,就问他:“目犍连,那些依大地而住的众生,你打算怎么办?”意思是:那些住在村落、城镇等地、依大地而住的众生,大地翻转时他们没法停在空中,你打算怎么处理,把他们安置到哪里?这时,长老为了展示与世尊授予他“神通第一”这一地位相称的自己的神通威力,就说:“尊者,我用一只手……”意思是:尊者,我要变化出一只如同这片大地的手,做成和大地相同的。然后,那些依大地而住的众生,就像把站在一只手掌上的众生移到另一只手掌上一样,我会把他们迁移到那里去。巴利
Sādhāhaṃ, bhanteti sādhu ahaṃ, bhante. Ettha sādhūti āyācanavacanametaṃ. Pathaviparivattanaṃ āyācanto hi thero bhagavantaṃ evamāha. Parivatteyyanti ukkujjeyyaṃ, heṭṭhimatalaṃ uparimaṃ kareyyaṃ. Kasmā? Evañhi kate sukhena bhikkhū pappaṭakojaṃ pathavimaṇḍaṃ paribhuñjissantīti. Atha bhagavā ananuññātukāmopi theraṃ sīhanādaṃ nadāpetuṃ pucchi – ‘‘ye pana te, moggallāna, pathavinissitā pāṇā te kathaṃ karissasī’’ti. Ye pathavinissitā gāmanigamādīsu pāṇā, te pathaviyā parivattiyamānāya ākāse saṇṭhātuṃ asakkonte kathaṃ karissasi, kattha ṭhapessasīti? Atha thero bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitabhāvānurūpaṃ attano iddhānubhāvaṃ pakāsento ‘‘ekāhaṃ, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – ekaṃ ahaṃ bhante hatthaṃ yathā ayaṃ mahāpathavī evaṃ abhinimminissāmi, pathavisadisaṃ karissāmi. Evaṃ katvā ye pathavinissitā pāṇā te ekasmiṃ hatthatale ṭhite pāṇe tato dutiyahatthatale saṅkāmento viya tattha saṅkāmessāmīti.
这时,世尊拒绝了他的请求,说:“够了,目犍连!”等等。这里“够了”是拒绝的话。意思是:众生甚至会得到颠倒想,会落入颠倒的执取。怎么个颠倒法呢?他们会想:“这到底是不是大地?”或者想:“这到底是我们的村子,还是别人的?”对城镇、国土、田地、园林等等,也会这样想。或者,这也不算颠倒,因为具神通者的神通境界本来就是不可思议的。然而,他们会这样生起颠倒想:“所谓饥荒,不是现在才有,将来也会有。到那时候,比丘们到哪里去找这样有神通的同梵行者呢?那些已经证得入流果、一来果、不来果的圣者,或者修干观的行者、得禅定的人、获得无碍解漏尽的人,即使已经达到这种程度,因为没有神通力,也不得不去别人家乞食。那时人们会这样想:‘佛陀在世时,比丘们圆满修学学处。他们成就了功德,在饥荒时翻转大地,吃大地精华。现在却没有圆满修学学处的人了。如果有的话,他们也会那样做。他们不会给我们任何熟的或生的食物。’这样一来,他们就会对那些圣者生起‘没有圣者’的颠倒想。由于这种颠倒想,他们就会诽谤、指责圣者,从而堕入恶趣。所以,你不要喜欢翻转大地。巴利
Athassa bhagavā āyācanaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘alaṃ moggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha alanti paṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti viparītaggāhampi sattā sampāpuṇeyyuṃ. Kathaṃ? Ayaṃ nu kho pathavī , udāhu na ayanti. Atha vā amhākaṃ nu kho ayaṃ gāmo, udāhu aññesa’’nti. Evaṃ nigamajanapadakhettārāmādīsu. Na vā esa vipallāso, acinteyyo hi iddhimato iddhivisayo. Evaṃ pana vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyuṃ – idaṃ dubbhikkhaṃ nāma na idāniyeva hoti, anāgatepi bhavissati. Tadā bhikkhū tādisaṃ iddhimantaṃ sabrahmacāriṃ kuto labhissanti? Te sotāpanna-sakadāgāmi-anāgāmi-sukkhavipassaka-jhānalābhi-paṭisambhidāppattakhīṇāsavāpi samānā iddhibalābhāvā parakulāni piṇḍāya upasaṅkamissanti. Tatra manussānaṃ evaṃ bhavissati – ‘‘buddhakāle bhikkhū sikkhāsu paripūrakārino ahesuṃ. Te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle pathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ paribhuñjiṃsu. Idāni pana sikkhāya paripūrakārino natthi. Yadi siyuṃ, tatheva kareyyuṃ. Na amhākaṃ yaṃ kiñci pakkaṃ vā āmaṃ vā khādituṃ dadeyyu’’nti. Evaṃ tesuyeva ariyapuggalesu ‘‘natthi ariyapuggalā’’ti imaṃ vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyuṃ. Vipallāsavasena ca ariye garahantā upavadantā apāyupagā bhaveyyuṃ. Tasmā mā te rucci pathaviṃ parivattetunti.
这时,长老未能实现这个请求,就又请求另一件事,说道:“萨度,尊者!”等等。世尊也同样拒绝他,说道:“够了,目犍连!”等等。这里虽然没有说“众生即使有颠倒想也会获得”,但应当依照前面所说的方式来理解;其含义也应知道与前面所说相同。如果世尊允许的话,长老会怎么做呢?他会决意一步跨过大海,使大海仅像一条窄窄的水道那样,然后从那勒鲁普奇曼陀开辟一条通往北俱卢洲的路,把北俱卢洲变成可以往来便利的地方,让比丘们就像进入行乞的村落一样,随意进去乞食再出来。巴利
Atha thero imaṃ yācanaṃ alabhamāno aññaṃ yācanto ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’tiādimāha. Tampissa bhagavā paṭikkhipanto ‘‘alaṃmoggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi na vuttaṃ ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti, atha kho pubbe vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ; atthopi cassa vuttasadisameva veditabbo. Yadi pana bhagavā anujāneyya, thero kiṃ kareyyāti? Mahāsamuddaṃ ekena padavītihārena atikkamitabbaṃ mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā naḷerupucimandato uttarakuruabhimukhaṃ maggaṃ nīharitvā uttarakuruṃ gamanāgamanasampanne ṭhāne katvā dasseyya, yathā bhikkhū gocaragāmaṃ viya yathāsukhaṃ piṇḍāya pavisitvā nikkhameyyunti.
关于制定戒律的请求这一事的注释巴利
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathāvaṇṇanā
18 18. 现在,具寿优波离为了从一开始就说明律制的根本因缘,在讲述与舍利弗长老的学处相关的思惟生起时,说了“那时,具寿舍利弗……”等话。其中,“独处”指去了僻静之处。“宴坐”指独自静坐,达到独一的状态。“哪些”指在过去维巴斯等诸佛中,哪些佛的。“久住”指长久存在,或长久存续,就是久住。这里其余的内容只是字面意思很清楚的部分。巴利
18. Idāni āyasmā upāli vinayapaññattiyā mūlato pabhuti nidānaṃ dassetuṃ sāriputtattherassa sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ vitakkuppādaṃ dassento ‘‘atha kho āyasmato sāriputtassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha rahogatassāti rahasi gatassa. Paṭisallīnassāti sallīnassa ekībhāvaṃ gatassa. Katamesānanti atītesu vipassīādīsu buddhesu katamesaṃ. Ciraṃ assa ṭhiti, cirā vā assa ṭhitīti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Sesamettha uttānapadatthameva.
那么,长老难道不能自己判断自己的这个想法吗?回答说:既能,也不能。他能判断到这种程度:这些佛陀的教法不久住,这些佛陀的教法久住。但是,由于什么原因不久住,由于什么原因久住,这个他判断不了。不过,玛哈巴杜玛长老说:“这件事对已经达到十六种智慧顶峰的上首弟子来说也不算什么难事,只是和正自觉者同住一处时,自己去做判断,就像扔掉秤用手来称量一样,所以他就去亲近世尊,向世尊请教。”于是,世尊为他解答,说了“舍利弗,维巴西世尊……”等话。这段话的意思很明白。巴利
Kiṃ pana thero imaṃ attano parivitakkaṃ sayaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sakkotīti? Vuccate – sakkoti ca na sakkoti ca. Ayañhi imesaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, imesaṃ ciraṭṭhitikanti ettakaṃ sakkoti vinicchinituṃ. Iminā pana kāraṇena na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, iminā ciraṭṭhitikanti etaṃ na sakkoti. Mahāpadumatthero panāha – ‘‘etampi soḷasavidhāya paññāya matthakaṃ pattassa aggasāvakassa na bhāriyaṃ, sammāsambuddhena pana saddhiṃ ekaṭṭhāne vasantassa sayaṃ vinicchayakaraṇaṃ tulaṃ chaḍḍetvā hatthena tulanasadisaṃ hotīti bhagavantaṃyeva upasaṅkamitvā pucchī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā taṃ vissajjento ‘‘bhagavato ca sāriputta vipassissā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānatthameva.
19 19. 接着,长老为了询问原因,说了“尊者,到底是什么因呢”等话。其中,“尊者,到底是什么呢”是在问原因,它的意思是“尊者,到底是哪一种呢”。“因”和“缘”这两个词都是原因的说法;因为由于它,果才得以生起、运转,所以称为“因”;因为依靠它才生起、运转,所以称为“缘”。这样一来,虽然意义上是一回事,但依据惯用说法和言辞顺口,在各种场合这两个词都会被用到。这里剩下的部分,意思都很浅显。巴利
19. Puna thero kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ko nu kho, bhante, hetūtiādimāha. Tattha ko nu kho bhanteti kāraṇapucchā , tassa katamo nu kho bhanteti attho. Hetu paccayoti ubhayametaṃ kāraṇādhivacanaṃ; kāraṇañhi yasmā tena tassa phalaṃ hinoti pavattati, tasmā hetūti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ paṭicca eti pavattati, tasmā paccayoti vuccati. Evaṃ atthato ekampi vohāravasena ca vacanasiliṭṭhatāya ca tatra tatra etaṃ ubhayampi vuccati. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
现在,为了说明那因和缘,说了“世尊以及舍利弗、维巴西佛”等话。在这里,“他们懈怠了吗”并不是指懒惰的懈怠,因为诸佛确实没有懒惰或精进退缩。诸佛无论为一个人、两个人还是整个轮围界说法,都以同等的精进说法,不会因为看到听众少就精进退缩,也不会因为看到听众众多就精进高涨。就像兽王狮子过了七天后出去觅食,无论对小的还是大的众生,都以同样的速度奔扑。这是什么原因呢?是为了“不让我的速度减退”。同样,诸佛无论对少数听众还是广大听众,都以同等的精进说法。这是什么原因呢?是为了“不让我们的敬法之心减退”。因为诸佛是敬法者,尊重法。巴利
Idāni taṃ hetuñca paccayañca dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā ca sāriputta vipassī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kilāsuno ahesunti na ālasiyakilāsuno, na hi buddhānaṃ ālasiyaṃ vā osannavīriyatā vā atthi. Buddhā hi ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā sakalacakkavāḷassa vā dhammaṃ desentā samakeneva ussāhena dhammaṃ desenti, na parisāya appabhāvaṃ disvā osannavīriyā honti, nāpi mahantabhāvaṃ disvā ussannavīriyā. Yathā hi sīho migarājā sattannaṃ divasānaṃ accayena gocarāya pakkanto khuddake vā mahante vā pāṇe ekasadiseneva vegena dhāvati. Taṃ kissa hetu? ‘‘Mā me javo parihāyī’’ti. Evaṃ buddhā appakāya vā mahatiyā vā parisāya samakeneva ussāhena dhammaṃ desenti. Taṃ kissa hetu? ‘‘Mā no dhammagarutā parihāyī’’ti. Dhammagaruno hi buddhā dhammagāravāti.
不过,我们的世尊说法时,就像把大海填满一样,讲得详尽广博;那些过去佛却不是这样说法。为什么呢?因为当时众生的烦恼尘垢少。据说在他们那个时代,众生寿命长,尘垢也少。他们只要听到一首与四圣谛相关的偈颂,就能通达法义,所以那些佛不用详尽广博的方式说法。正因为这个原因,他们的经藏等也篇幅很少……乃至……方广分也是如此。其中,经藏等的种种差别,在第一次结集的注释里已经说过了。巴利
Yathā pana amhākaṃ bhagavā mahāsamuddaṃ pūrayamāno viya vitthārena dhammaṃ desesi, evaṃ te na desesuṃ. Kasmā? Sattānaṃ apparajakkhatāya. Tesaṃ kira kāle dīghāyukā sattā apparajakkhā ahesuṃ. Te catusaccapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ekagāthampi sutvā dhammaṃ abhisamenti, tasmā na vitthārena dhammaṃ desesuṃ. Teneva kāraṇena appakañca nesaṃ ahosi suttaṃ…pe… vedallanti. Tattha suttādīnaṃ nānattaṃ paṭhamasaṅgītivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
还没有为弟子们制定学处,因为弟子们没有过失,所以没有按照他们的过失来制定应当制定的、属于七犯聚的制令学处。还没有诵巴帝摩卡,是指每半月应诵的制令巴帝摩卡当时还没有诵出。他们只诵说教诫巴帝摩卡,而且也不是每半月诵一次。就像维巴西世尊每六年才诵一次教诫巴帝摩卡,而且是世尊亲自诵说;他的弟子们并没有在各自的住处诵说。在整个赡部洲,只有一个地方,就是般度摩提王城的安稳鹿野苑,也就是维巴西世尊的住处,全体比丘僧团在那里举行伍波萨他。而且那只是僧团伍波萨他,不是别众伍波萨他,不是个人伍波萨他,不是清净伍波萨他,不是决意伍波萨他。巴利
Apaññattaṃsāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadanti sāvakānaṃ niddosatāya dosānurūpato paññapetabbaṃ sattāpattikkhandhavasena āṇāsikkhāpadaṃ apaññattaṃ. Anuddiṭṭhaṃpātimokkhanti anvaddhamāsaṃ āṇāpātimokkhaṃ anuddiṭṭhaṃ ahosi. Ovādapātimokkhameva te uddisiṃsu; tampi ca no anvaddhamāsaṃ. Tathā hi vipassī bhagavā channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ sakiṃ sakiṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisi; tañca kho sāmaṃyeva. Sāvakā panassa attano attano vasanaṭṭhānesu na uddisiṃsu. Sakalajambudīpe ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā kheme migadāye vipassissa bhagavato vasanaṭṭhāne sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho uposathaṃ akāsi. Tañca kho saṅghuposathameva; na gaṇuposathaṃ, na puggaluposathaṃ, na pārisuddhiuposathaṃ, na adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ.
据说那时,赡部洲有八万四千座精舍。每一座精舍里,单独住着的比丘有一万、两万,甚至更多。负责通报伍波萨他的天神到处去通告:诸位贤者,一年已经过去,两年、三年、四年、五年已经过去,现在是第六年,在下一个月圆日,为了见佛和举行伍波萨他,必须前往!你们集会的时刻到了。于是,有神通的比丘靠自己的神通前往,其余的比丘靠天神的神通前往。怎么去呢?据说那些比丘,无论是站在东海边,还是西海、北海、南海边,做完该做的义务后,拿起衣钵,心里生起“我们去吧”的念头;念头刚一升起,他们就已经到了伍波萨他堂。他们礼拜维巴斯正自觉者后,坐下来。世尊也在大众坐定后,诵说这篇教诫巴帝摩卡。巴利
Tadā kira jambudīpe caturāsītivihārasahassāni honti. Ekamekasmiṃ vihāre abbokiṇṇāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhusahassāni vasanti, bhiyyopi vasanti. Uposathārocikā devatā tattha tattha gantvā ārocenti – ‘‘mārisā, ekaṃ vassaṃ atikkantaṃ, dve tīṇi cattāri pañca vassāni atikkantāni, idaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ vassaṃ, āgāminiyā puṇṇamāsiyā buddhadassanatthaṃ uposathakaraṇatthañca gantabbaṃ! Sampatto vo sannipātakālo’’ti. Tato sānubhāvā bhikkhū attano attano ānubhāvena gacchanti, itare devatānubhāvena. Kathaṃ? Te kira bhikkhū pācīnasamuddante vā pacchimauttaradakkhiṇasamuddante vā ṭhitā gamiyavattaṃ pūretvā pattacīvaramādāya ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti cittaṃ uppādenti; saha cittuppādā uposathaggaṃ gatāva honti. Te vipassiṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ abhivādetvā nisīdanti. Bhagavāpi sannisinnāya parisāya imaṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisati.
忍耐是最高的苦行,这就是堪忍。
诸佛说,涅槃是至高无上的。
确实,出家修行的人不会伤害他人。
伤害他人的人,就不是沙门。
不造作一切恶行,圆满成就善行;
净化自己的心,这就是诸佛的教导。
“ 不诽谤,不伤害,在巴帝摩卡戒中守护自己;
对食物知道节制,并且住在偏僻的坐卧处;
还要致力于增上心,这就是诸佛的教法。”巴利
‘‘Khantī paramaṃ tapo titikkhā; Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā; Na hi pabbajito parūpaghātī; Na samaṇo hoti paraṃ viheṭhayanto. ‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsanaṃ. ‘‘Anupavādo anupaghāto, pātimokkhe ca saṃvaro; Mattaññutā ca bhattasmiṃ, pantañca sayanāsanaṃ; Adhicitte ca āyogo, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183-185);
按照同样的方式,也应该知道其他佛陀诵说巴帝摩卡的情形。因为一切佛陀都只有这三首教诫巴帝摩卡偈。对于长寿的佛陀,这些偈一直诵到教法灭尽为止;对于短寿的佛陀,则只在初成道时诵。然而从制定学处的时候开始,就只诵说制令巴帝摩卡。而且那是比丘们诵说的,不是佛陀诵说的。因此,我们的世尊也只在初成道后的二十年间诵说这首教诫巴帝摩卡。后来有一天,世尊坐在东园的鹿子母讲堂,对比丘们说:“诸比丘,从今以后,我不再举行伍波萨他、诵说巴帝摩卡了。诸比丘,从今以后,你们自己举行伍波萨他、诵说巴帝摩卡吧。诸比丘,如来在不清净的僧众中举行伍波萨他、诵说巴帝摩卡,无此道理,无此可能。”从此以后,比丘们就诵说制令巴帝摩卡。这首教诫巴帝摩卡是他们所未曾诵说的,因此说“未诵巴帝摩卡”。巴利
Eteneva upāyena itaresampi buddhānaṃ pātimokkhuddeso veditabbo. Sabbabuddhānañhi imā tissova ovādapātimokkhagāthāyo honti. Tā dīghāyukabuddhānaṃ yāva sāsanapariyantā uddesamāgacchanti; appāyukabuddhānaṃ paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva. Sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisīyati. Tañca kho bhikkhū eva uddisanti, na buddhā. Tasmā amhākampi bhagavā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassamattameva idaṃ ovādapātimokkhaṃ uddisi. Athekadivasaṃ pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde nisinno bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘na dānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, ito paraṃ uposathaṃ karissāmi pātimokkhaṃ uddisissāmi, tumheva dāni bhikkhave ito paraṃ uposathaṃ kareyyātha, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyātha. Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṃ tathāgato aparisuddhāya parisāya uposathaṃ kareyya, pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti (cūḷava. 386). Tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhū āṇāpātimokkhaṃ uddisanti. Idaṃ āṇāpātimokkhaṃ tesaṃ anuddiṭṭhaṃ ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anuddiṭṭhaṃ pātimokkha’’nti.
那些佛陀,指的是维巴西佛等三位佛陀。隐没,是指蕴的隐没,也就是般涅槃。随佛觉悟者,是指那些佛陀的亲传弟子,他们也随着蕴的隐没而离世。那些后来的弟子,是指在亲传弟子身边出家、属于后来的弟子。种种名,是指依佛护、丹玛·拉奇达等名字而有种种不同的名。种种姓,是指依乔达摩、目犍连等种姓而有种种不同的姓。种种出身,是指依刹帝利、婆罗门等出身而有种种不同的出身。从种种家出家,是指以刹帝利家等,或以高低、贵贱、贫富等家族方式,从各种不同的家族出离、出家。巴利
Tesaṃbuddhānanti tesaṃ vipassīādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ. Antaradhānenāti khandhantaradhānena; parinibbānenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Buddhānubuddhānanti ye tesaṃ buddhānaṃ anubuddhā sammukhasāvakā tesañca khandhantaradhānena. Ye te pacchimā sāvakāti ye tesaṃ sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajitā pacchimā sāvakā. Nānānāmāti ‘‘buddharakkhito, dhammarakkhito’’tiādi nāmavasena vividhanāmā. Nānāgottāti ‘‘gotamo, moggallāno’’tiādi gottavasena vividhagottā. Nānājaccāti ‘‘khattiyo, brāhmaṇo’’tiādijātivasena nānājaccā. Nānākulā pabbajitāti khattiyakulādivase neva uccanīcauḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vā vividhakulā nikkhamma pabbajitā.
那些后世的弟子,因为同名、同姓、同出身、同家族而出家,把“我们的教法是传统、是传承”当成自己的责任,守护梵行,长久地护持教理之法。而这些人却不是这样。因此,他们互相恼害,反过来执取,心里想着“某位长老会知道,某位长老会知道”,就松懈下来,很快使那梵行消失了,没有把它整理好加以守护。“譬如”是对这个意思的比喻说明。“散开”就是分散。“吹散”就是离开原来的位置。“摧毁”就是从所在之处移除。“如同没有被线串起来”,是说因为没有被线串起来、没有连接、没有绑缚,所以就像没有被线串起来的东西会散开一样,这里说的就是“散开”。“正是如此”是比喻与所喻的对应说明。“使消失”是指不用品集、五十集等方式来整理收摄,各自取用自己喜欢的,把其余的毁掉、令其消失不见。巴利
Tetaṃ brahmacariyanti te pacchimā sāvakā yasmā ekanāmā ekagottā ekajātikā ekakulā pabbajitā ‘‘amhākaṃ sāsanaṃ tanti paveṇī’’ti attano bhāraṃ katvā brahmacariyaṃ rakkhanti, ciraṃ pariyattidhammaṃ pariharanti. Ime ca tādisā na honti. Tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentā vilomaṃ gaṇhantā ‘‘asuko thero jānissati, asuko thero jānissatī’’ti sithilaṃ karontā taṃ brahmacariyaṃ khippaññeva antaradhāpesuṃ, saṅgahaṃ āropetvā na rakkhiṃsu. Seyyathāpīti tassatthassa opammanidassanaṃ. Vikiratīti vikkhipati. Vidhamatīti ṭhānantaraṃ neti. Viddhaṃsetīti ṭhitaṭṭhānato apaneti. Yathā taṃ suttena asaṅgahitattāti yathā suttena asaṅgahitattā aganthitattā abaddhattā evaṃ vikirati yathā suttena asaṅgahitāni vikiriyanti, evaṃ vikiratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evameva khoti opammasampaṭipādanaṃ. Antaradhāpesunti vaggasaṅgaha-paṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhi asaṅgaṇhantā yaṃ yaṃ attano ruccati, taṃ tadeva gahetvā sesaṃ vināsesuṃ adassanaṃ nayiṃsu.
那些世尊教导弟子时并不疲倦,他们以自己的心去洞察弟子的心。再者,舍利弗,那些佛陀以自己的心洞察、辨别弟子的心之后,教导他们并不感到疲倦;他们了知他人的心之后,并不觉得教导是负担,也不觉得是啰嗦。舍利弗,说“过去世”等话,是为了说明他们不疲倦的性质。“令人恐惧的”,就是恐怖的、让人心生恐惧的。“应当这样思惟”,就是应当思惟出离思惟等三种思惟。“不应当这样思惟”,就是不应当思惟欲思惟等三种不善思惟。“应当这样作意”,就是应当对无常、苦、无我、不净作意。“不应当这样作意”,就是不应当对常、乐、我、净作意。“应当舍弃这个”,就是应当舍弃不善。“应当具足这个而安住”,就是获得、成就善法之后,具足而安住。巴利
Akilāsuno ca te bhagavanto ahesuṃ sāvake cetasā ceto paricca ovaditunti apica sāriputta te buddhā attano cetasā sāvakānaṃ ceto paricca paricchinditvā ovadituṃ akilāsuno ahesuṃ, paracittaṃ ñatvā anusāsaniṃ na bhāriyato na papañcato addasaṃsu. Bhūtapubbaṃ sāriputtātiādi tesaṃ akilāsubhāvappakāsanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhiṃsanaketi bhayānake bhayajananake. Evaṃ vitakkethāti nekkhammavitakkādayo tayo vitakke vitakketha. Mā evaṃ vitakkayitthāti kāmavitakkādayo tayo akusalavitakke mā vitakkayittha. Evaṃ manasi karothāti ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubha’’nti manasi karotha. Mā evaṃ manasā katthāti ‘‘niccaṃ sukhaṃ attā subha’’nti mā manasi akarittha. Idaṃ pajahathāti akusalaṃ pajahatha. Idaṃ upasampajja viharathāti kusalaṃ upasampajja paṭilabhitvā nipphādetvā viharatha.
心不执取而解脱诸漏,意思是:没有执取而解脱。因为他们的心从那些漏中解脱时,并不是执取了那些漏才解脱的,而是以无生灭尽的方式,在灭尽时不执取而解脱。因此说:“心不执取而解脱诸漏。”他们所有人都证得阿拉汉果后,心就像被阳光照触的莲花丛一样绽放开来。至于“舍利弗,在那令人恐惧的丛林处,有令人恐惧之事”这一句,“tatra”是承接前文的话,也就是指前文所说的“在某令人恐惧的丛林中”,在那里,那个被称为令人恐惧的丛林,具有令人恐惧性,即以令人恐惧的作用而存在;“sudaṃ”只是填补音节的虚词;“sāriputta”是呼格。这里对义理的解释是:“tatra”即前面所说“在某令人恐惧的丛林中”,在那里,那个被称为令人恐惧的丛林,具有令人恐惧性,以令人恐惧的作用而存在,这就是意思。是什么存在呢?是这样的:任何未离贪者……乃至毛发竖立。巴利
Anupādāyaāsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti aggahetvā vimucciṃsu. Tesañhi cittāni yehi āsavehi vimucciṃsu, na te tāni gahetvā vimucciṃsu. Anuppādanirodhena pana nirujjhamānā aggahetvā vimucciṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsū’’ti. Sabbepi te arahattaṃ patvā sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhamiva padumavanaṃ vikasitacittā ahesuṃ. Tatra sudaṃ sāriputta bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hotīti tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ; sudanti padapūraṇamatte nipāto; sāriputtāti ālapanaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – tatrāti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍe’’ti, tatra yo so bhiṃsanakoti vanasaṇḍo vutto, tassa bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ hoti, bhiṃsanakiriyāya hotīti attho. Kiṃ hoti? Idaṃ hoti – yo koci avītarāgo…pe… lomāni haṃsantīti.
或者,“tatra”是表示所属关系的处格。“su”是虚词,就像“那些沙门婆罗门尊者们究竟叫什么名字”等句子里的用法一样。“idaṃ”是把想要表达的意思当作眼前可见的事物来指示的说法。“su idaṃ”就是“sudaṃ”,因为连音的关系省略了i音,这一点应当知道。就像“眼根、女根、未知当知根”、“究竟在这里有什么财富”等例子那样。这里的文意关联是这样的:舍利弗,在那令人恐惧的丛林里,在令人恐惧的状态中,有这些存在。“bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ”的意思是“在令人恐惧的状态中”,应当看出省略了一个t音;或者原文就是“bhiṃsanakattasmiṃ”;又或者本应说“bhiṃsanakatāya”,但出现了性别的转换。这里的处格表示原因,所以应当这样理解其关联:以令人恐惧的状态为原因、为条件、为缘,而有这些存在。任何还没有离贪的人进入那片丛林,大多数都会毛发竖立——也就是说,多数毛发竖立起来,向上竖起,像针一样、像荆棘一样立着,少数不竖立。或者说,多数众生的毛发竖立,少数极其勇猛的人毛发不竖立。巴利
Atha vā tatrāti sāmiatthe bhummaṃ. Suiti nipāto; ‘‘kiṃ su nāma te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.469) viya. Idanti adhippetamatthaṃ paccakkhaṃ viya katvā dassanavacanaṃ. Suidanti sudaṃ, sandhivasena ikāralopo veditabbo. ‘‘Cakkhundriyaṃ, itthindriyaṃ, anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ (vibha. 219), ‘‘kiṃ sūdha vitta’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.73, 246; su. ni. 183) viya. Ayaṃ panettha atthayojanā – tassa sāriputta bhiṃsanakassa vanasaṇḍassa bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ idaṃsu hoti. Bhiṃsanakatasminti bhiṃsanakabhāveti attho. Ekassa takārassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Bhiṃsanakattasmintiyeva vā pāṭho. ‘‘Bhiṃsanakatāya’’ iti vā vattabbe liṅgavipallāso kato. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā evaṃ sambandho veditabbo – bhiṃsanakabhāve idaṃsu hoti, bhiṃsanakabhāvanimittaṃ bhiṃsanakabhāvahetu bhiṃsanakabhāvapaccayā idaṃsu hoti. Yo koci avītarāgo taṃ vanasaṇḍaṃ pavisati, yebhuyyena lomāni haṃsantīti bahutarāni lomāni haṃsanti uddhaṃ mukhāni sūcisadisāni kaṇṭakasadisāni ca hutvā tiṭṭhanti, appāni na haṃsanti. Bahutarānaṃ vā sattānaṃ haṃsanti. Appakānaṃ atisūrapurisānaṃ na haṃsanti.
现在,“舍利弗,这就是因”等语是总结。这里中间没有说明的部分,意思都很浅显。因此应当顺着巴利文的次序来理解。至于说“没有长久住世”,应当理解为是就人代(一代代的人)来说的。因为按年数计算,维巴西世尊的寿命是八万岁,他的亲传弟子也是同样数目。这样一来,连同他最后一位弟子合计,梵行住世达十六万年。但若按人代来算,代代相续,只住世两代人就结束了,所以说“没有长久住世”。斯奇世尊的寿命是七万岁,他的亲传弟子也是同样数目。韦萨布世尊的寿命是六万岁,他的亲传弟子也是同样数目。同样地,他们各自最后一位弟子连同其寿命合计,梵行住世分别超过十万年,约为十四万年和十二万年。但若按人代来算,代代相续,也只各住世两代人就结束了,所以说“没有长久住世”。巴利
Idāni ayaṃ kho, sāriputta, hetūtiādi nigamanaṃ. Yañcettha antarantarā na vuttaṃ, taṃ uttānatthameva. Tasmā pāḷikkameneva veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosīti, taṃ purisayugavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vassagaṇanāya hi vipassissa bhagavato asītivassasahassāni āyu, sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Evamassa yvāyaṃ sabbapacchimako sāvako, tena saha ghaṭetvā satasahassaṃ saṭṭhimattāni ca vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Purisayugavasena pana yugaparamparāya āgantvā dveyeva purisayugāni aṭṭhāsi. Tasmā na ciraṭṭhitikanti vuttaṃ. Sikhissa pana bhagavato sattativassasahassāni āyu. Sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Vessabhussa bhagavato saṭṭhivassasahassāni āyu. Sammukhasāvakānampissa tattakameva. Evaṃ tesampi ye sabbapacchimakā sāvakā tehi saha ghaṭetvā satasahassato uddhaṃ cattālīsamattāni vīsatimattāni ca vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Purisayugavasena pana yugaparamparāya āgantvā dve dveyeva purisayugāni aṭṭhāsi. Tasmā na ciraṭṭhitikanti vuttaṃ.
20 舍利弗尊者听完三尊佛的梵行不能久住的原因后,又想听另外三尊佛的梵行能够久住的原因,于是再次用“尊者,那是什么因……”这样的话向世尊提问。世尊也为他作了解答。这一切应当按前面所说的反面来理解。关于“能够久住”,还应知道:那几尊佛的梵行能够久住,从寿量方面和从弟子代代相续方面,这两方面都算久住。咖咕桑特世尊的寿命是四万岁,果纳嘎玛那世尊的寿命是三万岁,迦叶世尊的寿命是二万岁;他们的亲传弟子寿命也同样是这么多。而且他们的弟子一对一对地代代相传,使梵行延续下去。这样一来,他们的梵行从寿量方面和从弟子相续方面,这两方面都得以久住。巴利
20. Evaṃ āyasmā sāriputto tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa na ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sutvā itaresaṃ tiṇṇaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sotukāmo puna bhagavantaṃ ‘‘ko pana bhante hetū’’ti ādinā nayena pucchi. Bhagavāpissa byākāsi. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttapaṭipakkhavasena veditabbaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikabhāvepi cettha tesaṃ buddhānaṃ āyuparimāṇatopi purisayugatopi ubhayathā ciraṭṭhitikatā veditabbā. Kakusandhassa hi bhagavato cattālīsavassasahassāni āyu, koṇāgamanassa bhagavato tiṃsavassasahassāni, kassapassa bhagavato vīsativassasahassāni; sammukhasāvakānampi nesaṃ tattakameva. Bahūni ca nesaṃ sāvakayugāni paramparāya brahmacariyaṃ pavattesuṃ. Evaṃ tesaṃ āyuparimāṇatopi sāvakayugatopi ubhayathā brahmacariyaṃ ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi.
我们的世尊本来应该在人寿一万岁的时候出现,也就是迦叶世尊寿量的一半。如果做不到,那就应该在人寿五千岁、人寿一千岁,甚至人寿五百岁的时候出现。然而,他寻求、遍求能成就佛果的诸法,并令智慧逐渐成熟,直到入胎的过程中,智慧一直到人寿百岁的时候才达到圆满。因此,他出现在寿命极其短促的时代。所以,他的梵行虽然依靠弟子代代相承而得以长久延续,但如果按寿量以年数来算,就只能说并不长久。巴利
Amhākaṃ pana bhagavato kassapassa bhagavato upaḍḍhāyukappamāṇe dasavassasahassāyukakāle uppajjitabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ asambhuṇantena pañcavassasahassāyukakāle, ekavassasahassāyukakāle, pañcavassasatāyukakālepi vā uppajjitabbaṃ siyā. Yasmā panassa buddhattakārake dhamme esantassa pariyesantassa ñāṇaṃ paripācentassa gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassa vassasatāyukakāle ñāṇaṃ paripākamagamāsi. Tasmā atiparittāyukakāle uppanno. Tenassa sāvakaparamparāvasena ciraṭṭhitikampi brahmacariyaṃ āyuparimāṇavasena vassagaṇanāya naciraṭṭhitikamevāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
21 那么,“那时,具寿舍利弗”这句话的连结是什么呢?他这样听闻了三尊佛的梵行长久住世之因后,得出结论:只有制立学处,才是梵行长久住世的因。具寿舍利弗希望世尊的梵行也能长久住世,于是向世尊请求制立学处。为了展示他请求的方式,才说了这句“那时,具寿舍利弗从座而起……长久住世”。其中,“addhaniyaṃ”是指能承受久远,也就是所谓的长久住世。其余内容意思浅显易懂。巴利
21.Atha kho āyasmā sāriputtoti ko anusandhi? Evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāraṇaṃ sutvā sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva ciraṭṭhitikabhāvahetūti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhagavatopi brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ icchanto āyasmā sāriputto bhagavantaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiṃ yāci. Tassā yācanavidhidassanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ – atha kho āyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāyāsanā …pe… ciraṭṭhitikanti. Tattha addhaniyanti addhānakkhamaṃ; dīghakālikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
这时,世尊为了说明“现在还不是制立学处的时候”,就说:“舍利弗,你暂且等着”等等。其中,“你暂且等着”意思是“你先停一停”,也就是“你先忍耐一下”。这里出于尊重,所以说了两遍。世尊以此否定了弟子有制立学处的权限,表明“制立学处只是如来的领域”,于是说“如来……”等等。这里,“于彼处”是依着请求制立学处而用的处格。这里的连起来的意思是:对于所说的“应制立学处”这件事,在那制立学处的事上,只有如来才会知道时机。这样说了之后,为了先显示时机未到,又说:“舍利弗,还不是时候”等等。巴利
Athassa bhagavā ‘‘na tāvāyaṃ sikkhāpadapaññattikālo’’ti pakāsento ‘‘āgamehi tvaṃ sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āgamehi tvanti tiṭṭha tāva tvaṃ; adhivāsehi tāva tvanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ādaratthavasenevettha dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ. Etena bhagavā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sāvakānaṃ visayabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘buddhavisayova sikkhāpadapaññattī’’ti āvikaronto ‘‘tathāgato vā’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca tatthāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyyā’’ti, tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā tathāgatoyeva kālaṃ jānissatīti. Evaṃ vatvā akālaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘na tāva sāriputtā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“诸漏安住于这些之中”,所以称为“漏的住处”。意思是:那些现世与来世的苦漏、烦恼漏,都确实安住于这些之中,而诽谤、追悔、杀害、系缚等,以及作为恶趣种种苦的诸漏,正是它们生起的因。这些漏的住处,也就是违犯之法,只要还没有在僧团中出现,导师就不会为弟子制定学处——这是这一段的意思。因为如果还没出现就制定,就逃不开他人的诽谤、非难和呵责。巴利
Tattha āsavā tiṭṭhanti etesūti āsavaṭṭhānīyā. Yesu diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā dukkhāsavā kilesāsavā ca parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhanādayo ceva apāyadukkhavisesabhūtā ca āsavā tiṭṭhantiyeva, yasmā nesaṃ te kāraṇaṃ hontīti attho. Te āsavaṭṭhānīyā vītikkamadhammā yāva na saṅghe pātubhavanti, na tāva satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti ayamettha yojanā. Yadi hi paññapeyya, parūpavādā parūpārambhā garahadosā na parimucceyya.
怎么讲?如果制戒的人要把“任何比丘若行淫法”等等全部一并制定出来,那才应该这样做。可是,人们还没有看见违犯的过失,就先知道这条规定,便会这样诽谤、责难和呵斥乔达摩沙门:“乔达摩沙门凭什么说‘我的比丘僧众追随我、听从我的话’,却用学处把他们捆住,甚至制定巴拉基格?难道这些善男子不是舍弃了大堆财富、庞大的亲属圈子,连到手的王位也放下了,才出家过活,满足于粗食蔽体,对学处极为恭敬,对身体和性命都不在乎吗?在他们当中,谁会去行那种属于世间利养的淫法,或者偷拿别人的东西,或者断送别人可爱、可意、极甜美的性命,或者靠编造不实的功德来活命呢?就算巴拉基格还没制定,单凭出家这件事,这些就已经明摆着了。”而且,众生也不会知道如来的威力和力量。已经制定的学处也会被破坏,不能稳稳地待在它该在的位置上。就像有个不高明的医生,把某个还没长疮的人叫来,说:“来,朋友,你身上这个部位会长出一个大疮,带来灾祸和毁灭,你该趁早治它。”那人说:“好的,老师,就请您给我治吧。”于是医生切开他健康的身体部位,放出血来,再用涂药、包扎、清洗等办法让那个地方长好皮,然后对那人说:“你的大病我给你治好了,把酬劳给我吧。”那人就会这样诽谤他、责难他、呵斥他:“这个蠢医生在说什么?他到底给我治好了什么病?他这分明是让我受苦,还让我失了血!”也不会知道他的功劳。同样,如果违犯的过失还没出现,导师就给弟子制定学处,就逃不开别人的诽谤等等,众生也不会知道他的威力和力量,已经制定的学处也会被破坏,不能稳稳地待在它该在的位置上。所以说:“舍利弗,只要导师还没有……出现。”巴利
Kathaṃ? Paññapentena hi ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’tiādi sabbaṃ paññapetabbaṃ bhaveyya. Adisvāva vītikkamadosaṃ imaṃ paññattiṃ ñatvā pare evaṃ upavādañca upārambhañca garahañca pavatteyyuṃ – ‘‘kathañhi nāma samaṇo gotamo bhikkhusaṅgho me anvāyiko vacanakaroti ettāvatā sikkhāpadehi paliveṭhessati, pārājikaṃ paññapessati? Nanu ime kulaputtā mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ mahantañca ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ hatthagatāni ca rajjānipi pahāya pabbajitā, ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhā, sikkhāya tibbagāravā, kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhā viharanti. Tesu nāma ko lokāmisabhūtaṃ methunaṃ vā paṭisevissati, parabhaṇḍaṃ vā harissati, parassa vā iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ atimadhuraṃ jīvitaṃ upacchindissati, abhūtaguṇakathāya vā jīvitaṃ kappessati! Nanu pārājike apaññattepi pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevetaṃ pākaṭaṃ kata’’nti. Tathāgatassa ca thāmañca balañca sattā na jāneyyuṃ. Paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ kuppeyya, na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyya. Seyyathāpi nāma akusalo vejjo kañci anuppannagaṇḍaṃ purisaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘ehi bho purisa, imasmiṃ te sarīrappadese mahāgaṇḍo uppajjitvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpessati, paṭikacceva naṃ tikicchāpehī’’ti vatvā ‘‘sādhācariya, tvaṃyeva naṃ tikicchassū’’ti vutto tassa arogaṃ sarīrappadesaṃ phāletvā lohitaṃ nīharitvā ālepanabandhanadhovanādīhi taṃ padesaṃ sañchaviṃ katvā taṃ purisaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘mahārogo te mayā tikicchito, dehi me deyyadhamma’’nti. So taṃ ‘‘kimayaṃ bālavejjo vadati? Kataro kira me iminā rogo tikicchito? Nanu me ayaṃ dukkhañca janeti, lohitakkhayañca maṃ pāpetī’’ti evaṃ upavadeyya ceva upārambheyya ca garaheyya ca, na cassa guṇaṃ jāneyya. Evameva yadi anuppanne vītikkamadose satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, parūpavādādīhi ca na parimucceyya, na cassa thāmaṃ vā balaṃ vā sattā jāneyyuṃ, paññattampi sikkhāpadaṃ kuppeyya, na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyya. Tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘na tāva sāriputta satthā sāvakānaṃ…pe… pātubhavantī’’ti.
先说明“非时”,接着要说明“适时”,所以说了“当舍利弗……”等话。其中,“当”就是“在……的时候”,意思是“在那个时节”。其余部分按前面所说的方式理解即可。这里简略的意思是:当那些被称为“有害法”的犯戒过失在僧团中出现时,导师就为弟子制定学处,诵说巴帝摩卡。为什么呢?为了对治那些被称为“有害法”的犯戒过失。这样制定学处时,就像一位善巧的医生,对已经生出的疮用切开、涂药、包扎、清洗等方法治疗,使疾病平息、皮肤愈合,他不但不会遭到诽谤等指责,反而因为自己的医术能力被人知道而获得尊敬;同样,导师不但不会遭到诽谤等指责,反而因为一切知智领域的能力被人知道而获得尊敬。而且他所制定的学处不会被破坏,会安住在它应在的位置上。巴利
Evaṃ akālaṃ dassetvā puna kālaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yato ca kho sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatoti yadā; yasmiṃ kāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vā hettha saṅkhepattho – yasmiṃ samaye ‘‘āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatā vītikkamadosā saṅghe pātubhavanti, tadā satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti, uddisati pātimokkhaṃ. Kasmā? Tesaṃyeva ‘‘āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatānaṃ vītikkamadosānaṃ paṭighātāya. Evaṃ paññapento yathā nāma kusalo vejjo uppannaṃ gaṇḍaṃ phālanalepanabandhanadhovanādīhi tikicchanto rogaṃ vūpasametvā sañchaviṃ katvā na tveva upavādādiraho hoti, sake ca ācariyake viditānubhāvo hutvā sakkāraṃ pāpuṇāti; evaṃ na ca upavādādiraho hoti, sake ca sabbaññuvisaye viditānubhāvo hutvā sakkāraṃ pāpuṇāti. Tañcassa sikkhāpadaṃ akuppaṃ hoti, yathāṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti.
像这样,在说明“漏处之法”不生起是制戒的适时、生起是非时之后,现在为了显示那些法不生起之时和生起之时,说了“舍利弗,于此尚无某些……”等话。其中,含义明显的词句应直接依据经文来了知。以下是对含义不明显词句的解释:“知夜者”(rattaññū)就是知道夜晚的人,意思是从自己出家那天算起,知道很多夜晚,也就是说出家很久了。由久出家者而有的伟大,叫“久出家之伟大”(rattaññumahatta);意思是因久出家而具有的伟大。应当知道,当僧团达到久出家之伟大时,是针对伍巴塞那·旺甘德之子而制定了学处。那位尊者看到不足十夏的比丘给人授具足戒,就以仅有一夏的身份为共住弟子授了具足戒。于是世尊制定了学处:“诸比丘,不足十夏者不得授人具足戒。若授者,犯恶作。”(《大品》75)这样制戒之后,比丘们又以“我们满十夏了,我们满十夏了”为由,愚痴、不聪明地给人授具足戒。于是世尊又制定了另一条学处:“诸比丘,愚痴、不聪明者不得授人具足戒。若授者,犯恶作。诸比丘,我允许聪明、有能力的比丘,满十夏或超过十夏者,给人授具足戒。”(《大品》76)在达到久出家之伟大时,制定了这两条学处。巴利
Evaṃ āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattiṃ sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ uppattiñca kālanti vatvā idāni tesaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattikālañca uppattikālañca dassetuṃ ‘‘na tāva sāriputta idhekacce’’tiādimāha. Tattha uttānatthāni padāni pāḷivaseneva veditabbāni. Ayaṃ pana anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – rattiyo jānantīti rattaññū, attano pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya bahukā rattiyo jānanti, cirapabbajitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rattaññūhi mahattaṃ rattaññumahattaṃ; cirapabbajitehi mahantabhāvanti attho. Tatra rattaññumahattaṃ patte saṅghe upasenaṃ vaṅgantaputtaṃ ārabbha sikkhāpadaṃ paññattanti veditabbaṃ. So hāyasmā ūnadasavasse bhikkhū upasampādente disvā ekavasso saddhivihārikaṃ upasampādesi. Atha bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi – ‘‘na, bhikkhave , ūnadasavassena upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 75). Evaṃ paññatte sikkhāpade puna bhikkhū ‘‘dasavassāmha dasavassāmhā’’ti bālā abyattā upasampādenti. Atha bhagavā aparampi sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpesi – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, bālena abyattena upasampādetabbo. Yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, byattena bhikkhunā paṭibalena dasavassena vā atirekadasavassena vā upasampādetu’’nti (mahāva. 76) rattaññumahattaṃ pattakāle dve sikkhāpadāni paññattāni.
广大之伟大,是指以广大的状态而伟大。因为僧团只要还没有因为长老、新学、中座比丘而达到广大之伟大,住处和坐处就还够用,教法中某些能生漏的法就不会生起。一旦达到了广大之伟大,那些法就会生起。这时,导师就为弟子们制定学处。其中,在僧团达到广大之伟大时所制定的学处,应当按这样的方式来了知:若比丘与未受具足戒者同宿超过两夜三夜,犯巴吉帝亚;若比丘尼每年度人受具足戒,犯巴吉帝亚;若比丘尼一年中度两人受具足戒,犯巴吉帝亚。巴利
Vepullamahattanti vipulabhāvena mahattaṃ. Saṅgho hi yāva na theranavamajjhimānaṃ vasena vepullamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva senāsanāni pahonti. Sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjanti. Vepullamahattaṃ pana patte te uppajjanti. Atha satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti. Tattha vepullamahattaṃ patte saṅghe paññattasikkhāpadāni ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu anupasampannena uttari dirattatirattaṃ sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ’’ (pāci. 51); ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī anuvassaṃ vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiyaṃ’’ (pāci. 1171); ‘‘yā pana bhikkhunī ekaṃ vassaṃ dve vuṭṭhāpeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 1175) iminā nayena veditabbāni.
“利养的最上广大”是指利养的最上广大状态;达到了利养中最上、最殊胜、广大的境地,这就是它的意思。或者也可以理解为:通过利养而达到最上广大,通过利养而达到最胜、广大。因为僧团只要还没有达到利养的最上广大,就不会因为利养而生起那些漏处法;一旦达到了,就会生起。这时,导师为弟子们制定学处:“若比丘亲手把嚼食或啖食给予裸形外道、男游行者或女游行者,犯巴吉帝亚。”(巴吉帝亚第41条)这条学处,正是在僧团达到利养的最上广大时制定的。巴利
Lābhaggamahattanti lābhassa aggamahattaṃ; yo lābhassa aggo uttamo mahantabhāvo, taṃ patto hotīti attho. Lābhena vā aggamahattampi, lābhena seṭṭhattañca mahantattañca pattoti attho. Saṅgho hi yāva na lābhaggamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva na lābhaṃ paṭicca āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā uppajjanti. Patte pana uppajjanti, atha satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti – ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu acelakassa vā paribbājakassa vā paribbājikāya vā sahatthā khādanīyaṃ vā bhojanīyaṃ vā dadeyya, pācittiya’’nti (pāci. 270). Idañhi lābhaggamahattaṃ patte saṅghe sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ.
“多闻的广大”:就是多闻达到广大的状态。僧团确实在还没有达到多闻的广大之前,那些会成为漏的依处之法不会生起。可是,一旦达到了多闻的广大,有些人学了一部尼柯耶、两部……乃至五部尼柯耶之后,因为不恰当地浮想分别,就以一味配一味、互相混杂,宣扬非法、非律、导师的教法。于是导师便依照“若有比丘这样说——我这样了知世尊所说法……乃至沙弥若也这样说”这一类方式(巴吉帝亚第418条)制定学处。巴利
Bāhusaccamahattanti bāhusaccassa mahantabhāvaṃ. Saṅgho hi yāva na bāhusaccamahattaṃ patto hoti, tāva na āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā uppajjanti. Bāhusaccamahattaṃ patte pana yasmā ekampi nikāyaṃ, dvepi…pe… pañcapi nikāye uggahetvā ayoniso ummujjamānā puggalā rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvā uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ dīpenti. Atha satthā ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya – tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi…pe… samaṇuddesopi ce evaṃ vadeyyā’’tiādinā (pāci. 418) nayena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti.
世尊这样说明了诸漏所依之法未生起的时候和已生起的时候,接着为了显示在那个时候这些法完全不存在,就说“舍利弗,确实无疮疱”等等。其中,“无疮疱”就是远离疮疱;所谓疮疱,指的是盗贼,也就是没有盗贼的意思。而在这里,“盗贼”指的正是持恶戒的人。因为他们明明不是沙门,却自称是沙门,盗取他人的供养。所以“无疮疱”就是无贼、无恶戒的意思。“无过患”就是无灾祸、无恼害;也就是说远离了恶戒等过患。“离黑”中,所谓黑,指的就是持恶戒的人;他们即使身现金色,因为与黑法相应,也应当被看作是黑。由于这些人不存在,所以是“离黑”。也有写成“已除黑”的版本。“清净”就是因为离黑,所以清净、洁白、光明。“住立于核心”中,所谓核心,指的是戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见这些功德;因为安住于这个核心,所以说“住立于核心”。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā āsavaṭṭhānīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppattikālañca uppattikālañca dassetvā tasmiṃ samaye sabbasopi tesaṃ abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nirabbudo hi sāriputtā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nirabbudoti abbudavirahito; abbudā vuccanti corā, niccoroti attho. Corāti ca imasmiṃ atthe dussīlāva adhippetā. Te hi assamaṇāva hutvā samaṇapaṭiññatāya paresaṃ paccaye corenti. Tasmā nirabbudoti niccoro, niddussīloti vuttaṃ hoti. Nirādīnavoti nirupaddavo nirupasaggo; dussīlādīnavarahitoyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Apagatakāḷakoti kāḷakā vuccanti dussīlāyeva; te hi suvaṇṇavaṇṇāpi samānā kāḷakadhammayogā kāḷakātveva veditabbā. Tesaṃ abhāvā apagatakāḷako . Apahatakāḷakotipi pāṭho. Suddhoti apagatakāḷakattāyeva suddho pariyodāto pabhassaro. Sāre patiṭṭhitoti sāro vuccanti sīla-samādhi-paññāvimutti-vimuttiñāṇadassanaguṇā, tasmiṃ sāre patiṭṭhitattā sāre patiṭṭhito.
这样说明了安住于核心之后,为了再显示“他安住于核心”这件事,并说明应当这样理解,便说了“舍利弗,因为这些……”等话。这里作一个简略解释——在毗兰若城进入雨安居的这五百位比丘当中,按功德来说排在最后、功德最少的那位比丘,就是入流者。所谓入流者,就是已经进入了流;而“流”是道的别名。所谓入流者,就是指具足这个道的人。正如经中所说——巴利
Evaṃ sāre patiṭṭhitabhāvaṃ vatvā puna so cassa sāre patiṭṭhitabhāvo evaṃ veditabboti dassento imesañhi sāriputtāti ādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – yānimāni verañjāyaṃ vassāvāsaṃ upagatāni pañca bhikkhusatāni, imesaṃ yo guṇavasena pacchimako sabbaparittaguṇo bhikkhu, so sotāpanno. Sotāpannoti sotaṃ āpanno; sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotāpannoti tena samannāgatassa puggalassa. Yathāha –
“舍利弗,人们常说‘流、流’,什么是流呢?”
“尊者,这八支圣道就是流,也就是正见……乃至正定。”
“舍利弗,人们常说‘入流者、入流者’,什么是入流者呢?”
“尊者,凡是具足这八支圣道的人,就称为入流者。这位尊者有这样的名、这样的姓。”不过在这里,是用道的名字来称呼果位。所以,应当知道安住于果位的人就是“入流者”。巴利
‘‘Soto sototi hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati; katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sototi? Ayameva hi, bhante, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti. ‘‘Sotāpanno sotāpannoti hidaṃ, sāriputta, vuccati; katamo nu kho, sāriputta, sotāpanno’’ti? ‘‘Yo hi, bhante, iminā ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena samannāgato, ayaṃ vuccati – sotāpanno. Soyamāyasmā evaṃnāmo evaṃgotto’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1001). Idha pana maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinnaṃ. Tasmā phalaṭṭho ‘‘sotāpanno’’ti veditabbo.
“无堕法”是指:会使人堕落的就是“堕”;他没有堕法,所以叫“无堕法”。这句话的意思是:他没有那种会让自己堕入恶趣的本性。为什么呢?因为那些会导向恶趣的法已经灭尽了。或者说,“堕”就是堕落;他没有堕法,所以叫“无堕法”。这句话的意思是:他没有在恶趣中堕落的本性。由于依正性决定之道而成为决定,所以叫“决定”。以正觉为最终归趣、最终去处,所以叫“以正觉为归趣”。意思是:必定能通达上面的三道。为什么呢?因为已经证得了初道。巴利
Avinipātadhammoti vinipātetīti vinipāto; nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Ye dhammā apāyagamanīyā, tesaṃ parikkhayā. Vinipatanaṃ vā vinipāto, nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo, apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvo assa natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sammattaniyāmena maggena niyatattā niyato. Sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ parā gati assāti sambodhiparāyaṇo. Upari maggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpakoti attho. Kasmā? Paṭiladdhapaṭhamamaggattāti.
佛陀的惯行故事巴利
Buddhāciṇṇakathā
22 世尊这样把法将(舍利弗)劝服之后,在毗兰若城度过了那个雨安居。安居结束、举行了大自恣后,世尊便召唤具寿阿难。这里的“召唤”意思是称呼他、对他说、让他明白。说的是什么呢?就是“这确实是诸佛的惯行……”等等。“惯行”指的是已经实行、已经奉行的行为,也就是随顺法性的做法。这种惯行有两种:佛陀的惯行和声闻弟子的惯行。什么是佛陀的惯行呢?先说这一条:如果受到某人邀请而住雨安居,不先向对方辞别、不告知,就不会启程去各地游行。而声闻弟子们则不管辞别还是不辞别,随自己方便就出发。巴利
22. Evaṃ dhammasenāpatiṃ saññāpetvā verañjāyaṃ taṃ vassāvāsaṃ vītināmetvā vutthavasso mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi. Āmantesīti ālapi abhāsi sambodhesi. Kinti? Āciṇṇaṃ kho panetanti evamādi. Āciṇṇanti caritaṃ vattaṃ anudhammatā. Taṃ kho panetaṃ āciṇṇaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti – buddhāciṇṇaṃ, sāvakāciṇṇanti. Katamaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ? Idaṃ tāva ekaṃ – yehi nimantitā vassaṃ vasanti, na te anapaloketvā anāpucchitvā janapadacārikaṃ pakkamanti. Sāvakā pana apaloketvā vā anapaloketvā vā yathāsukhaṃ pakkamanti.
还有另一种诸佛的惯常做法:雨安居结束后举行自恣,然后为了摄受大众,就直接出发到各地游行。他们在各地游行时,会在三种区域中的某一种区域内游行,也就是大区域、中区域、末区域。其中,大区域方圆九百由旬,中区域方圆六百由旬,末区域方圆三百由旬。如果诸佛想在大区域游行,就在大自恣时举行自恣,然后在自恣结束后的第一天,由大批比丘僧众随行出发,在村落、城镇等地,通过接受信众的饮食供养来摄受大众,又以法施使他们那趋向出离的善法增长,用九个月完成各地游行。但如果雨安居期间比丘们的止观还不成熟,就不举行大自恣,而是举行摄自恣,在迦提月满月日自恣,然后在末伽始罗月第一天,由大批比丘僧众随行出发,按前面说的方式,用八个月在中区域完成游行。如果那些雨安居结束的比丘们,所应化导的众生根器还没成熟,为了等待他们根器成熟,就在末伽始罗月也继续住在那裡,到了颇沙月第一天,由大批比丘僧众随行出发,按前面说的方式,用七个月在末区域完成游行。他们在这些区域中无论游走到哪里,都使那些众生脱离烦恼,让他们证得入流果等,只是随着所应化导众生的情况而行,就像采摘各种颜色的花朵一样。巴利
Aparampi buddhāciṇṇaṃ – vutthavassā pavāretvā janasaṅgahatthāya janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantiyeva. Janapadacārikaṃ carantā ca mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ antimamaṇḍalanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maṇḍalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ maṇḍale caranti. Tattha mahāmaṇḍalaṃ navayojanasatikaṃ, majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ chayojanasatikaṃ, antimamaṇḍalaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ. Yadā mahāmaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmā honti, tadā mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā pāṭipadadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā gāmanigamādīsu mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhantā dhammadānena cassa vivaṭṭupanissitaṃ kusalaṃ vaḍḍhentā navahi māsehi janapadacārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Sace pana antovasse bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanā taruṇā honti, mahāpavāraṇāya appavāretvā pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvā kattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ pavāretvā māgasirassa paṭhamadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā vuttanayeneva majjhimamaṇḍale aṭṭhahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Sace pana nesaṃ vutthavassānaṃ aparipākindriyā veneyyasattā honti, tesaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ āgamentā māgasiramāsampi tattheva vasitvā phussamāsassa paṭhamadivase mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā vuttanayeneva antimamaṇḍale sattahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Tesu ca maṇḍalesu yattha katthaci vicarantāpi te te satte kilesehi viyojentā sotāpattiphalādīhi payojentā veneyyavaseneva nānāvaṇṇāni pupphāni ocinantā viya caranti.
诸佛还有一种日常习惯:每天清晨,以寂静的乐——也就是涅槃——作为所缘,进入果定;从果定出来后,每天进入大悲定;从大悲定出来后,观察一万个轮围世界中应当教化的众生。巴利
Aparampi buddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ – devasikaṃ paccūsasamaye santaṃ sukhaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ katvā phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ, phalasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā devasikaṃ mahākaruṇāsamāpattiyā samāpajjanaṃ, tato vuṭṭhahitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷe bodhaneyyasattasamavalokanaṃ.
诸佛还有一种常行:对来客先主动打招呼问候,根据发生的事缘说法,当过失出现时就制定学处。这就是诸佛的常行。巴利
Aparampi buddhānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ – āgantukehi saddhiṃ paṭhamataraṃ paṭisanthārakaraṇaṃ, aṭṭhuppattivasena dhammadesanā, otiṇṇe dose sikkhāpadapaññāpananti idaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ.
什么是声闻的常行?在佛陀世尊在世的时候,有两次集会:一次是在入雨安居之前,为了领受业处;一次是在雨安居结束之后,为了报告所证得的功德,并进一步领受业处。这就是声闻的常行。在这里,为了显示诸佛的常行,他说:“阿难,这确实是诸如来的常行。”巴利
Katamaṃ sāvakāciṇṇaṃ? Buddhassa bhagavato kāle dvikkhattuṃ sannipāto pure vassūpanāyikāya ca kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ, vutthavassānañca adhigataguṇārocanatthaṃ upari kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthañca . Idaṃ sāvakāciṇṇaṃ. Idha pana buddhāciṇṇaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘āciṇṇaṃ kho panetaṃ, ānanda, tathāgatāna’’nti.
“我们走吧”意思是“来,我们走”。“请允许”意思是为了游方而行,我们要去告辞。“如是”是表示接受的虚词。“尊者”是表示尊敬的称呼,作为对导师的回答也可以。“他回应了世尊”意思是他回应了世尊的话,面向世尊聆听并接受。用“如是”这个词,就是说他已经接受了。巴利
Āyāmāti āgaccha yāma. Apalokessāmāti cārikaṃ caraṇatthāya āpucchissāma. Evanti sampaṭicchanatthe nipāto. Bhanteti gāravādhivacanametaṃ; satthuno paṭivacanadānantipi vaṭṭati. Bhagavato paccassosīti bhagavato vacanaṃ paṭiassosi, abhimukho hutvā suṇi sampaṭicchi. Evanti iminā vacanena paṭiggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
当时,世尊穿好衣服——这里并没有说是在上午还是傍晚。尽管如此,世尊吃完饭、度过正午之后,让尊者阿难作为随行沙门,从城门开始,以如纯金般璀璨的光芒照亮城中的街道,前往维兰若婆罗门的住处。世尊刚站到门口,仆人一看见世尊,便进去通报了。婆罗门回过神来,心生警醒,急忙起身,铺设了尊贵的座位,出来迎接世尊,说道:“世尊,请从这边过来。”世尊走上前去,坐在铺设好的座位上。随后,维兰若婆罗门想坐到世尊身边,便从自己站立的地方走向世尊。从这里往后,文义就很浅显了。巴利
Atha kho bhagavā nivāsetvāti idha pubbaṇhasamayanti vā sāyanhasamayanti vā na vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi bhagavā katabhattakicco majjhanhikaṃ vītināmetvā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ pacchāsamaṇaṃ katvā nagaradvārato paṭṭhāya nagaravīthiyo suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhi raṃsīhi samujjotayamāno yena verañjassa brāhmaṇassa nivesanaṃ tenupasaṅkami. Gharadvāre ṭhitamattameva cassa bhagavantaṃ disvā parijano ārocesi. Brāhmaṇo satiṃ paṭilabhitvā saṃvegajāto sahasā vuṭṭhāya mahārahaṃ āsanaṃ paññapetvā bhagavantaṃ paccuggamma ‘‘ito, bhagavā, upasaṅkamatū’’ti āha. Bhagavā upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ upanisīditukāmo attanā ṭhitapadesato yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Ito paraṃ uttānatthameva.
婆罗门说的“而且,凡是该布施的东西,那都没有被布施”,这里的意思是:对于受我邀请、在我这里住过雨安居的你们,这三个月中,我本该每天早晨布施粥和嚼食,中午布施嚼食和正食,傍晚用种种饮料、香、花等作供养和恭敬——像这样一类该布施的东西,本该布施给你们,却没有布施。至于“那确实是我们没有的”这一句,要知道这里性颠倒了。这里的意思是:“那个该布施的东西,我们确实没有。”或者,这里的意思也可以理解为:“我们本该布施给你们的那些布施物品,那确实是我们没有的。”巴利
Yaṃ pana brāhmaṇo āha – ‘‘apica yo deyyadhammo, so na dinno’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – mayā nimantitānaṃ vassaṃvutthānaṃ tumhākaṃ temāsaṃ divase divase pāto yāgukhajjakaṃ, majjhanhike khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ, sāyanhe anekavidha pānavikati gandhapupphādīhi pūjāsakkāroti evamādiko yo deyyadhammo dātabbo assa, so na dinnoti. Tañca kho no asantanti ettha pana liṅgavipallāso veditabbo. So ca kho deyyadhammo amhākaṃ no asantoti ayañhettha attho. Atha vā yaṃ dānavatthuṃ mayaṃ tumhākaṃ dadeyyāma, tañca kho no asantanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“并非不愿布施”是说:并不是没有布施的意愿,不像那些财物资具丰厚却吝啬的人。“那么,这怎么能得到呢?在家生活事务繁多。”这里应当这样理解:因为在家生活事务繁多,所以即使有可布施之物,也有布施的意愿,又怎么能得到呢?怎么能做到“我们布施给你们可布施之物”呢?他这样说,是在责备在家生活。据说,他并不知道自己被魔罗所控制,还以为“因为在家生活的障碍,我失去了正念”,所以才这样说。再者,“那在这里怎么能得到呢?”意思是:在这三个月当中,我本该布施给你们的,怎么能得到呢?因为在家生活确实事务繁多。应当知道,这里应当这样理解。巴利
Nopiadātukamyatāti adātukāmatāpi no natthi, yathā pahūtavittūpakaraṇānaṃ maccharīnaṃ. Taṃ kutettha labbhā bahukiccā gharāvāsāti tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yasmā bahukiccā gharāvāsā, tasmā ettha santepi deyyadhamme dātukamyatāya ca taṃ kuto labbhā kuto taṃ sakkā laddhuṃ, yaṃ mayaṃ tumhākaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dadeyyāmāti gharāvāsaṃ garahanto āha. So kira mārena āvaṭṭitabhāvaṃ na jānāti, ‘‘gharāvāsapalibodhena me satisammoso jāto’’ti maññi, tasmā evamāha. Apica – taṃ kutettha labbhāti imasmiṃ temāsabbhantare yamahaṃ tumhākaṃ dadeyyaṃ, taṃ kuto labbhā? Bahukiccā hi gharāvāsāti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
这时,那位婆罗门心想:“我原本要在三个月里供养的东西,不如全部在一天之内就供养出去吧。”于是他说了“请乔达摩尊者接受我”等话。其中,“为明日”的意思是:为了我恭敬供养你们时,明天将会产生的福德,以及喜悦和欢愉。接着,如来心想:“如果我不接受,这位婆罗门就会认为:‘这个人三个月来什么都没得到,大概是生气了,所以即使我请求,他连一餐也不接受。这个人没有接受的忍耐心,并不是一切知者。’这样一来,婆罗门和毗兰若的居民们就会责备我,造下许多非福。愿他们不要这样。”出于对他们的悲悯,世尊以默然的方式接受了。巴利
Atha brāhmaṇo ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ yaṃ me tīhi māsehi dātabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ ekadivaseneva dadeyya’’nti cintetvā adhivāsetu me bhavaṃ gotamotiādimāha. Tattha svātanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu sakkāraṃ karoto sve bhavissati puññañceva pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Atha tathāgato ‘‘sace ahaṃ nādhivāseyyaṃ, ‘ayaṃ temāsaṃ kiñci aladdhā kupito maññe, tena me yāciyamāno ekabhattampi na paṭiggaṇhāti, natthi imasmiṃ adhivāsanakhanti, asabbaññū aya’nti evaṃ brāhmaṇo ca verañjāvāsino ca garahitvā bahuṃ apuññaṃ pasaveyyuṃ, taṃ tesaṃ mā ahosī’’ti tesaṃ anukampāya adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvena.
世尊接受邀请后,先让毗兰若婆罗门明白:“别再为在家生活的牵绊而操心了。”接着,顺着当时的情形,用符合佛法的谈话,为他开示现世和来世的利益,引导他接受善法,让他掌握,又当场鼓励他、使他充满干劲,再以这份干劲和其他现有的优点让他欢喜,降下了一场法的珍宝之雨,然后从座位上起身离开了。
世尊离开后,毗兰若婆罗门对妻子儿女说:“各位,我们邀请世尊住三个月,却连一天一顿饭都没供养过。来吧,现在就把布施准备好,让三个月的供品能在明天一天之内全部供养出去。”
于是,他让人准备了精美的布施。在邀请世尊的那一天过后,第二天夜里过去,他让人装饰好座位处,铺设了极为贵重的座位,备办了香、熏香、花鬘等种种庄严的大供养,然后派人去禀告世尊时间到了。
因此说:“那时,毗兰若婆罗门在那夜过后……(中略)……饭食已备。”巴利
Adhivāsetvā ca atha kho bhagavā verañjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ ‘‘alaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhacintāyā’’ti saññāpetvā taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammiyā kathāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā kusale dhamme samādapetvā gaṇhāpetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Pakkante ca pana bhagavati verañjo brāhmaṇo puttadāraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘mayaṃ, bhaṇe, bhagavantaṃ temāsaṃ nimantetvā ekadivasaṃ ekabhattampi nādamha. Handa, dāni tathā dānaṃ paṭiyādetha yathā temāsikopi deyyadhammo sve ekadivaseneva dātuṃ sakkā hotī’’ti. Tato paṇītaṃ dānaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā yaṃ divasaṃ bhagavā nimantito, tassā rattiyā accayena āsanaṭṭhānaṃ alaṅkārāpetvā mahārahāni āsanāni paññapetvā gandhadhūmavāsakusumavicitraṃ mahāpūjaṃ sajjetvā bhagavato kālaṃ ārocāpesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo tassā rattiyā accayena…pe… niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’’nti.
23 23. 世尊被比丘僧团围绕着,来到了那里。因此说:“那时,世尊……(中略)……与比丘僧团一同坐下。”这里“以佛为首的比丘僧团”意思是:以佛为引导者,把佛作为僧团中的上座而坐下。“殊胜的”就是最上等的。“亲手”就是用自己的手。“令饱足”就是好好地令满足,使之圆满、饱足、随其所愿。“令谢拒”就是好好地令拒绝,通过手势、面部表情和言语表示“够了”,使他停止。“已食”就是已经吃过的人。“钵已离手”就是手已经从钵移开,意思是手已经拿开了。他以三衣覆盖赠送,就是把三衣供养给世尊。不过“以三衣覆盖赠送”只是一句惯用语,那三衣中每一件布都值一千。就这样,婆罗门供养了世尊价值三千的三衣,如同最上等的迦尸布。又以一对布一一供养每一位比丘,其中一件布值五百。这样,他为五百比丘供养了价值五十万的布。婆罗门给了这么多还是不满足,又把价值七八千的许多红毯和绢布等撕开,分给比丘们做系带、腰带、滤水囊等用途。又把百煎、千煎的药油灌满葫芦,给每一位比丘价值千金的涂身油。何必多说,在四种资具中,没有哪一样沙门所用的物品是他没有供养的。不过经文中只提到了衣。巴利
23. Bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto tattha agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā…pe… nisīdi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti. Atha kho verañjo brāhmaṇo buddhappamukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅghanti buddhappamukhanti buddhapariṇāyakaṃ; buddhaṃ saṅghattheraṃ katvā nisinnanti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā ‘ala’nti hatthasaññāya mukhasaññāya vacībhedena ca paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ. Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ; apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ticīvarena acchādesīti ticīvaraṃ bhagavato adāsi. Idaṃ pana vohāravacanamattaṃ hoti ‘‘ticīvarena acchādesī’’ti, tasmiñca ticīvare ekameko sāṭako sahassaṃ agghati. Iti brāhmaṇo bhagavato tisahassagghanakaṃ ticīvaramadāsi uttamaṃ kāsikavatthasadisaṃ. Ekamekañca bhikkhuṃ ekamekena dussayugenāti ekamekena dussayugaḷena. Tatra ekasāṭako pañcasatāni agghati. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcasatasahassagghanakāni dussāni adāsi. Brāhmaṇo ettakampi datvā atuṭṭho puna sattaṭṭhasahassagghanake anekarattakambale ca paṭṭuṇṇapattapaṭe ca phāletvā phāletvā āyogaaṃsabaddhakakāyabandhanaparissāvanādīnaṃ atthāya adāsi. Satapākasahassapākānañca bhesajjatelānaṃ tumbāni pūretvā ekamekassa bhikkhuno abbhañjanatthāya sahassagghanakaṃ telamadāsi. Kiṃ bahunā, catūsu paccayesu na koci parikkhāro samaṇaparibhogo adinno nāma ahosi. Pāḷiyaṃ pana cīvaramattameva vuttaṃ.
婆罗门这样举行了盛大的供养,又和妻儿一起礼敬(世尊),然后坐下。那时,世尊因为毗兰若婆罗门整整三个月被魔障缠住,没能听闻正法、品尝法味,便在一天之内为他降下法甘露之雨,使他心愿圆满,又以法谈开示他……(中略)……然后从座位起身离去。婆罗门也和妻儿一起礼敬世尊和比丘僧团,一边说着“尊者,请以后也继续护念我们”这样的话,一边跟在后面,流着泪,然后才转身回去。巴利
Evaṃ mahāyāgaṃ yajitvā saputtadāraṃ vanditvā nisinnaṃ atha kho bhagavā verañjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ temāsaṃ mārāvaṭṭanena dhammasavanāmatarasaparibhogaparihīnaṃ ekadivaseneva dhammāmatavassaṃ vassetvā puripuṇṇasaṅkappaṃ kurumāno dhammiyākathāya sandassetvā…pe… uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Brāhmaṇopi saputtadāro bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca vanditvā ‘‘punapi, bhante, amhākaṃ anuggahaṃ kareyyāthā’’ti evamādīni vadanto anubandhitvā assūni pavattayamāno nivatti.
那时,世尊在毗兰若随心所欲地住了一段时间——也就是随自己的意愿、随自己的喜好住下之后,便离开毗兰若。在广大地区游化的时候,因为饥荒的过患,比丘僧团疲惫不堪,世尊想带他们走直路,就舍弃了佛陀常行的大道,没有去索雷亚等地,而是带着他们沿直路前往钵罗耶伽渡口,在那里渡过恒河,然后向波罗奈方向前行,就到了那里。所谓“向彼而去”,就是到了那里。在那里也随心住了一段时间后,又前往毗舍离。因此说:“未到索雷亚……(中略)……在毗舍离大林重阁讲堂住。”巴利
Atha kho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ yathābhirantaṃ viharitvāti yathājjhāsayaṃ yathārucitaṃ vāsaṃ vasitvā verañjāya nikkhamitvā mahāmaṇḍale cārikāya caraṇakāle gantabbaṃ buddhavīthi pahāya dubbhikkhadosena kilantaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ujunāva maggena gahetvā gantukāmo soreyyādīni anupagamma payāgapatiṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tattha gaṅgaṃ nadiṃ uttaritvā yena bārāṇasī tadavasari. Tena avasari tadavasari. Tatrāpi yathājjhāsayaṃ viharitvā vesāliṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anupagamma soreyyaṃ…pe… vesāliyaṃ viharati mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāya’’nti.
从师父代代相传的角度,以及从阐明因缘基础分类的角度;
既因为远离他人的宗派主张,也因为自宗清净。
从净化文句,从词义,从巴利语连缀的顺序;
从学处的判定,以及从分别理趣之差别之显示来看,
在观察者看来,这里看不到任何不清净的东西。
所以,这正是智者所认可的“完全清净”本身。
善巧于调伏应化者所造之注释,
乃悲悯世间之世间怙主所说律藏(之注释)。巴利
Ācariyaparamparato, nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanato; Parasamayavivajjanato, sakasamayavisuddhito ceva. Byañjanaparisodhanato, padatthato pāḷiyojanakkamato; Sikkhāpadanicchayato, vibhaṅganayabhedadassanato. Sampassataṃ na dissati, kiñci apāsādikaṃ yato ettha; Viññūnamayaṃ tasmā, samantapāsādikātveva. Saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā, vinayassa vineyyadamanakusalena; Vuttassa lokanāthena, lokamanukampamānenāti.